PY
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
D
C
O
Bread and Pastry
Production
EP
E
Manual
D
This learning resource was collaboratively developed and
reviewed by educators from public and private schools, colleges, and/or
universities. We encourage teachers and other education stakeholders to
email their feedback, comments and recommendations to the
Department of Education at action@deped.gov.ph.
We value your feedback and recommendations.
Department of Education
Republic of the Philippines
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Bread and Pastry – Technical-Vocational-Livelihood Track
Manual
First Edition 2016
Republic Act 8293. Section 176 states that: No copyright shall subsist in any work
of the Government of the Philippines. However, prior approval of the government agency or
office wherein the work is created shall be necessary for exploitation of such work for profit.
Such agency or office may, among other things, impose as a condition the payment of
royalties.
PY
Borrowed materials (i.e., songs, stories, poems, pictures, photos, brand names,
trademarks, etc.) included in this learning resource are owned by their respective
copyright holders. DepEd is represented by the Filipinas Copyright Licensing Society
(FILCOLS), Inc. in seeking permission to use these materials from their respective
copyright owners. All means have been exhausted in seeking permission to use these
materials. The publisher and authors do not represent nor claim ownership over them.
C
O
Only institutions and companies which have entered an agreement with FILCOLS
and only within the agreed framework may copy from this Manual. Those who have not
entered in an agreement with FILCOLS must, if they wish to copy, contact the publishers and
authors directly.
Authors and publishers may email or contact FILCOLS at filcols@gmail.com or (02)
435-5258, respectively.
D
Published by the Department of Education
Secretary: Br. Armin A. Luistro FSC
Undersecretary: Dina S. Ocampo, PhD
EP
E
Development Team of the Bread and Pastry Production Manual
Writers:
Aniceta S. Kong
Cristeta M. Arcos
Anecita P. Domo,
Maila A. Dogelio
Reviewers:
Layout Artist:
Illustrator:
Cover Artist:
Prof. Emelita Nuyda
Christian Bjorn R. Cunanan
Eric S. De Guia
Ricardo Jose V. Santillan III
Jocelyn de Jesus
Fermin Fabella
Jason Villena
D
Management Team of the Bread and Pastry Production Manual
Bureau of Curriculum Development
Bureau of Learning Resources
Printed in the Philippines by Sunshine Interlinks Publishing House, Inc.
3F Maine City Tower, 236 Tomas Morato Avenue,
Brgy. South Triangle, Quezon City
Department of Education-Bureau of Learning Resources (DepEd-BLR)
Office Address: Ground Floor Bonifacio Building, DepEd Complex
Meralco Avenue, Pasig City, Philippines 1600
Telefax:
(02) 634-1054, 634-1072, 631-4985
E-mail Address: blr.lrqad@deped.gov.ph / blr.lrpd@deped.gov.ph
ii
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Introduction
PY
The Technology and Livelihood Education (TLE) for junior high school and TechnicalLivelihood-Vocational Education (TVL) for senior high school is one track in the
implementation of the K to 12 Basic Education Program (BEP). It is composed of four
components, namely: Agri-Fishery Arts, Home Economics, Industrial Arts, and Information
and Communication Technology. Learners in Grades 7 and 8 may take an exploratory course
on the subject; tackling common competencies that they would need, should they wish to
have a career in TLE/TVL. Their learnings and competencies are then further enhanced in
Grades 9 and 10, up to Senior High.
C
O
This learning resource focuses on the course Bread and Pastry Production (National
Certificate Level II) under Home Economics of the TLE/TVL track. The Department of
Education aims that this learning resource contributes to the attainment of the realization
of the overall goal of the K to 12 Basic Education Program, which is the holistic development
of every Filipino learner: equipped with 21st century skills, adequately prepared for work,
and has gained the right knowledge, attitude, values and skills to start a business, acquire
middle level skills, and to advance in higher education.
Bread and Pastry Production Manual
EP
E
D
This Manual includes information and activities to develop desirable values, skills
and understanding through step-by-step procedures and helpful techniques and guidelines
on how to prepare, present, display, and store bakery products, pastries, petit fours, cakes,
and desserts. Provisions for practical application to real life situation are also included for
lifelong learning.
To the Learner:
D
This Manual provides varied and relevant activities and opportunities to determine
your understanding of the key concepts and to demonstrate core competencies as
prescribed in the TESDA Training Regulation in Bread and Pastry Production.
This manual is specifically crafted to focus on the different activities that will assess
your level in terms of skills and knowledge necessary to get a Certificate of Competency
and/or National Certification (NC II).
Successful completion of this course ensures that you have acquired the essential
skills to be on your way to becoming a certified bread and pastry producer.
iii
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
HOW TO USE THIS LEARNER’S MANUAL
Here are some reminders on how to use this material.
PY
1. Answer the pre-assessment before you proceed to the different activities. The
pre-assessment determines how much you know about the lessons and
identifies the areas you ought to learn more. Your teacher will check and
analyze your score to determine your learning needs.
C
O
2. This learner’s manual contains relevant information and activities. Go over each
activity carefully. If you encounter difficulties, do not hesitate to consult your
teacher for assistance. Do not skip any topic unless you are told to do so.
REMEMBER that each activity is a preparation for the succeeding activities.
D
3. For every lesson/learning outcome, answer the self-check and perform the given
activities to enrich your knowledge and skills.
EP
E
4. After successfully finishing the tasks, answer the post-assessment to be given
by your teacher. Your score will be analyzed and will be used by your teacher
for the computation of your grades.
D
5. Lastly, DO NOT mark the learner’s manual in any way.
iv
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction……………………………………………………….................
Page
iii
How to use this Learner’s Material …………………………….................
iv
7
10
10
16
16
19
20
24
29
30
42
43
45
48
48
50
53
57
Post-assessment....................................................................................
Generalization.........................................................................................
59
62
EP
E
D
C
O
PY
Quarter I
Definition of Terms.................................................................................
Pre-assessment.....................................................................................
Lesson 1: Prepare and Produce Bakery Products
LO 1 Prepare Bakery Products...................................................
Self Check 1.1.1..............................................................
Activity 1.1.1....................................................................
Self Check 1.1.2..............................................................
Activity 1.1.2....................................................................
Self Check 1.1.3..............................................................
Activity 1.1.3 ...................................................................
Self Check 1.1.4..............................................................
Self Check 1.1.5..............................................................
Activity 1.1.4 ...................................................................
Activity 1.1.5 ...................................................................
LO 2 Decorate and Present Bakery Products............................
Self Check 1.2.1..............................................................
Self Check 1.2.2..............................................................
Activity 1.2.1....................................................................
LO 3 Store Bakery Products.......................................................
Self Check 1.3.1..............................................................
Activity 1.3.1....................................................................
D
Quarter II
Definition of Terms..................................................................................
Pre-assessment......................................................................................
Lesson 2: Prepare and Produce Pastry Products
LO 1 Prepare Pastry Products ....................................................
Self Check 2.1.1...............................................................
Self Check 2.1.2...............................................................
Activity 2.1.1.....................................................................
Self Check 2.1.3...............................................................
Activity 2.1.2.....................................................................
Activity 2.1.3.....................................................................
Activity 2.1.4.....................................................................
Activity 2.1.5.....................................................................
Activity 2.1.6.....................................................................
v
2
4
64
65
68
73
78
78
87
87
90
93
95
96
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
98
100
101
104
104
107
110
111
111
114
Post-assessment...................................................................................
Generalization.......................................................................................
115
118
PY
Activity 2.1.7...................................................................
Activity 2.1.8...................................................................
Activity 2.1.9...................................................................
Self Check 2.1.4.............................................................
LO 2 Decorate and Present Pastry ...........................................
Self Check 2.2.1.............................................................
Self Check 2.2.2.............................................................
Self Check 2.2.3.............................................................
LO 3 Store Pastry Products.......................................................
Activity 2.3.1...................................................................
127
127
130
133
136
153
155
157
157
159
161
163
165
168
171
171
172
174
177
178
181
183
189
189
Post-assessment....................................................................................
Generalization.............................................................………................
191
194
D
EP
E
D
C
O
Quarter III
Definition of Terms................................................................................
Pre-assessment....................................................................................
Lesson 3: Prepare and Present Gateaux, Tortes and Cakes
LO 1 Prepare Sponge Cake.......................................................
Self Check 3.1.1 .............................................................
Activity 3.1.1 ...................................................................
Self Check 3.1.2 .............................................................
Self Check 3.1.3 .............................................................
Self Check 3.1.4 .............................................................
Self Check 3.1.5 .............................................................
Self Check 3.1.6 .............................................................
Activity 3.1.2 ...................................................................
Activity 3.1.3 ...................................................................
Activity 3.1.4 ...................................................................
Activity 3.1.5 ...................................................................
LO 2 Prepare and Use Fillings...................................................
Self Check 3.2.1..............................................................
Self Check 3.2.2..............................................................
Activity 3.2.1 ...................................................................
LO 3 Decorate Cakes..................................................................
Self Check 3.3.1..............................................................
Activity 3.3.1 ...................................................................
LO 4 Present Cakes....................................................................
Activity 3.4.1 ...................................................................
LO 5 Store Cakes..............................................…...........………
Self Check 3.5.1..............................................................
Activity 3.5.1 ...................................................................
vi
120
123
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
C
O
PY
Quarter IV
Definition of Terms................................................................................
Pre-assessment.....................................................................................
Lesson 4: Prepare and Display Petit Fours
LO 1 Prepare Iced Petit Fours...................................................
Activity 4.1.1...................................................................
Activity 4.1.2...................................................................
Activity 4.1.3...................................................................
LO 2 Prepare Fresh Petit Fours.................................................
Activity 4.2.1...................................................................
LO 3 Prepare Marzipan Petit Fours...........................................
Activity 4.3.1...................................................................
Activity 4.3.2...................................................................
Activity 4.3.3...................................................................
LO 4 Prepare Caramelized Petit Fours......................................
Activity 4.4.1....................................................................
LO 5 Display Petit Fours.............................................................
LO 6 Store Petit Fours…………………....................……………
D
Lesson 5: Present Desserts (PD)
LO 1 Present and Serve Plated Desserts...................................
LO 2 Plan, Prepare and Present Dessert Buffet
Selection or Plating............................................................
LO 3 Store and Package Desserts.............................................
Activity 5.3.1....................................................................
EP
E
Post-assessment....................................................................................
Generalization.........................................................................................
202
204
206
209
211
213
215
217
218
220
223
226
227
228
229
235
237
243
244
247
248
251
D
References..............................................................................................
Answer key..............................................................................................
195
199
vii
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
viii
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
The learners
demonstrate an
understanding of
the core
concepts and
theories in bread
and pastry
production
CONTENT
STANDARD
D
1. Accurate measurement of
ingredients
2. Baking ingredients and its
The learners
demonstrate an
understanding of
C
O
The learners
independently
demonstrate core
competencies in
bread and pastry
production as
prescribed in the
TESDA Training
Regulation
PERFORMANCE
STANDARD
The learners
independently
demonstrate core
Quarter 1
Lesson 1: PREPARE AND PRODUCE BAKERY PRODUCTS
Introduction
1. Basic concepts in bread and
pastry production
2. Relevance of the course
3. Career opportunities
CONTENT
EP
E
D
LO 1. Prepare bakery
products
1.1 Select, measure and
weigh required ingredients
PY
The learners:
1. explain core concepts in
bread and pastry
production
2. discuss the relevance of
the course
3. explore opportunities in
bread and pastry
production
LEARNING
COMPETENCIES
TLE_HEBP912PB-Ia-f-1
CODE
K to 12 BASIC EDUCATION CURRICULUM
JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL TECHNICAL LIVELIHOOD EDUCATION AND SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL – TECHNICAL
VOCATIONAL-LIVELIHOOD TRACK
HOME ECONOMICS – BREAD AND PASTRY PRODUCTION (NC II)
(160 hours)
Course Description:
This curriculum guide on Bread and Pastry Production course leads to National Certificate Level II (NCII). This course is
designed for high school student to develop knowledge, skills, and attitude to perform the tasks on Bread and Pastry Production.
It covers core competencies namely: 1) prepare and produce bakery products; 2) prepare and produce pastry products; 3)
prepare and present gateau, tortes and cakes; 4) prepare and display petit fours and 5) present deserts.
The preliminaries of this specialization course includes the following: 1) Explain core concepts in bread & pastry production ; 2)
Discuss the relevance of the course 3) Explore on opportunities for a Baker or Commis as a career.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
ix
7.1. Dinner roll
7.2. Pan de sal
7.3. Cinnamon roll
7.4. Ensaymada
7.5. Pan de coco
C
O
competencies in
preparing and
producing bakery
products
PERFORMANCE
STANDARD
D
the core concepts
and theories in
bread and pastry
production
CONTENT
STANDARD
EP
E
D
substitution
3. Types, kinds, and
classification of bakery products
4. Mixing procedures/
formulation/ recipes, and desired
product characteristics of various
bakery products
5. Baking techniques,
appropriate conditions and
enterprise requirements and
standards
6. Temperature ranges in bakery
products
7. Suggested projects:
CONTENT
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
1.5 Select required oven
temperature to bake goods
in accordance with the
desired characteristics,
standards recipe
specifications
1.4 Bake bakery products
according to techniques
and appropriate conditions
PY
1.3 Use appropriate
equipment according to
required bakery products
and standard operating
procedures
1.2 Prepare a variety of
bakery products according
to standard mixing
procedures/ formulation/
recipes and desired
product characteristics
according to recipe or
production requirements
LEARNING
COMPETENCIES
CODE
x
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
EP
E
D
CONTENT
STANDARD
PERFORMANCE
STANDARD
7. Baking techniques
appropriate conditions, and
enterprise requirements and
standards
6. Baking tools, equipment, and
their uses and functions
5. Mixing
procedures/formulation/recipes
and desired product
characteristics of various pastry
products
4. Types, kinds, and
classification of pastry products
3. Correct proportion control,
yields, weights and sizes for
profitability
2. Ratio of ingredients required
to produce a balance formula
1. Culinary and technical terms
related to pastry products
The learner
demonstrates
understanding of
the basic
concept and
underlying
theories in
preparing and
producing pastry
products
D
C
O
The learner
demonstrate
competencies in
preparing and
producing pastry
products
Quarter 2
LESSON 1: PREPARE AND PRODUCE PASTRY PRODUCTS (PP)
CONTENT
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
1.4. Bake pastry products
according to techniques
and appropriate
conditions; and enterprise
requirement and standards
1.3. Use appropriate
equipment according to
required pastry products
and standard operating
procedures
PY
1.2. Prepare variety of
pastry products according
to standard mixing
procedures/formulation/
recipes and desired
product characteristics
LO 1. Prepare pastry
products
1.1. Select, measure and
weigh required ingredients
according to recipe or
production requirements
and established standards
and procedures
LEARNING
COMPETENCIES
TLE_HEBP912PP-IIa-g-4
CODE
xi
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
13. Decorative techniques and
rules for garnishing
14. The tools and materials in
12. Regular and special fillings
and coating/icing, glazes and
decorations
11. Types and classifications of
fillings, coatings/icing and glazes
10.1 Pies
- Pineapple pie
- Buko pie
- Egg pie
10.2 Pizza
10.3 Empanada
10.4 Tart
10.5 Etc.
10. Suggested projects:
9. Occupational health and
safety
CONTENT
STANDARD
EP
E
D
8. Temperature ranges in baking
pastry products
CONTENT
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
D
C
O
PERFORMANCE
STANDARD
LO 2. Decorate and
present
Pastry products
2.1 Prepare a variety of
fillings and coating/icing,
glazes and decorations for
pastry products according
to standard recipes,
enterprise standards
and/or customer
preferences
PY
1.5. Select required oven
temperature to bake goods
in accordance with the
desired characteristics,
standards recipe
specifications and
enterprise practices
LEARNING
COMPETENCIES
TLE_HEBP912PP-IIh-i-5
CODE
xii
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
22. Standards and procedures in
packaging pastry product
21. Different kinds of packaging
materials to be used
20. Standards and procedures in
storing pastry products
19. Shelf-life of pastry products
18. Plating and presenting
pastry products
17. Standards and procedures in
finishing pastry products
CONTENT
STANDARD
EP
E
D
15. Standards and procedures in
decorating pastry products
16. Occupational Health and
Safety
decorating, finishing and
presenting
CONTENT
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
D
C
O
PERFORMANCE
STANDARD
3.2 Select packaging
appropriate for the
preservation of product
freshness and eating
characteristics
3.1 Store pastry products
according to established
standards and procedures
PY
2.4 Present baked pastry
products according to
established standards and
procedures
LO 3. Store pastry
products
2.3 Finish pastry products
according to desired
product characteristics
2.2 Fill and decorate
pastry products, where
required and appropriate,
in accordance with
standard recipes and/or
enterprise standards and
customer preferences
LEARNING
COMPETENCIES
TLE_HEBP912PP-IIj-6
CODE
xiii
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
CONTENT
STANDARD
EP
E
D
PERFORMANCE
STANDARD
9. Required equipment and
materials for sponge and cakes
8. Mixing methods used for variety
of sponge and cakes
7. Classification of the different
types of sponge and cakes
6. Pre-heating the oven
5. Specific temperature used for
different types of sponge and
cakes
4. Main ingredients used for
variety of sponge and cakes
3. Correct proportion control,
yields, weights and sizes for
profitability
2. How to measure ingredients
1. Culinary terms related to
sponge and cakes
C
O
The learner
demonstrate
competencies in
preparing and
presenting
gateaux, tortes
and cakes
D
The learner
demonstrates
understanding of
the core concept
and underlying
theories in
preparing and
presenting
gateaux, tortes
and cakes
LEARNING
COMPETENCIES
1.4 Use appropriate
equipment according to
required pastry and bakery
1.3 Prepare sponges and
cakes according to recipe
specifications, techniques
and conditions and desired
product characteristics
PY
1.2 Select required oven
temperature to bake goods
in accordance with desired
characteristics, standard
recipe specifications and
enterprise practices
1.1 Select, measure and
weigh ingredients
according to recipe
requirements, enterprise
practices and customer
practices
LO 1. Prepare sponge
and cakes
Quarter 3
LESSON 1: PREPARE AND PRESENT GATEAUX, TORTES AND CAKES (TC)
CONTENT
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
TLE_HEBP912TC-IIIa-f-7
CODE
xiv
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
11. Cooling temperature of sponge
and cakes
19. Filling and assembling cakes
according to the standard recipe
18. Identification of the required
consistency and appropriate
flavor of fillings
17. Identification of fillings
appropriate in a specific cakes
16. Chocolate cake
15. Chiffon cake with boiled icing
or fondant icing
14. Sponge cake with butter cream
filling and icing
13. Batter cake with butter icing
12. Suggested projects:
CONTENT
STANDARD
EP
E
D
10. Recipe specifications,
techniques and conditions and
desired product characteristics
CONTENT
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
D
C
O
PERFORMANCE
STANDARD
2.2 Fill and assemble slice
or layer sponges and
2.1 Prepare and select
fillings in accordance with
required consistency and
appropriate flavors
PY
LO 2. Prepare and use
fillings
1.6 Cool sponges and
cakes according to
established standards and
procedures
products and standard
operating procedures
LEARNING
COMPETENCIES
TLE_HEBP912TC-IIIg-8
CODE
xv
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
24. Types of icing/frosting and
their uses
23. Identification and application
of steps and procedure in icing a
cake.
22. Identification of standard
recipes of icings and
decorations for sponge and
cakes
21. Identification of specific
decorations appropriate for
sponge and cakes
CONTENT
STANDARD
EP
E
D
20. Classification of coatings
and sidings based on the
required recipe specifications
and product characteristics
specifications
CONTENT
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
D
C
O
PERFORMANCE
STANDARD
3.2 Use suitable icings and
decorations according to
standard recipes and/or
enterprise standards and
customer preferences
PY
3.1 Decorate sponges and
cakes suited to the product
and occasion and in
accordance with standard
recipes and enterprise
practices
LO 3. Decorate cakes
2.3 Select coatings and
sidings according to the
product characteristics and
required recipe
specification
cakes according to
standard recipe
specifications, enterprise
practice and customer
preferences
LEARNING
COMPETENCIES
TLE_HEBP912TC-IIIh-i-9
CODE
xvi
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
28. Cutting portion-controlled to
minimize the wastage of cake
29. Standard size and weight
per serving
27. Identification of the product
freshness, appearance,
characteristics of prepared
cakes
26. Selection and usage of
equipment in accordance with
service requirements
CONTENT
STANDARD
EP
E
D
25. Presenting and plating
sponge and cakes
CONTENT
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
D
C
O
PERFORMANCE
STANDARD
4.5. Marked cakes or cut
portion-controlled to
minimize wastage and in
accordance with enterprise
specifications and
customer preferences
PY
4.4. Maintain product
freshness, appearances
and eating qualities in
accordance with the
established standards and
procedures
4.3. Select and use
equipment in accordance
with service requirements
4.2. established standards
and procedures
4.1. Present cakes in
accordance with
customer’s expectations
and
LO 4. Present cakes
LEARNING
COMPETENCIES
TLE_HEBP912TC-IIIj-10
CODE
xvii
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
D
5. Procedure in making fondant
icing
1.3 Prepare fondant icing
1.2 Prepare fillings with the
required flavors and
consistency
1.1 Prepare, cut and
assemble sponges and
bases according to standard
recipes and enterprise
requirements and practices
PY
5.2. Identify storage
methods in accordance
with product specifications
and established standards
and procedures
5.1. Store cakes in
accordance with
establishment’s standards
and procedures
LO 5. Store cakes
LEARNING
COMPETENCIES
LO 1. Prepare iced petit
fours
C
O
PERFORMANCE
STANDARD
Quarter 4
LESSON 1: PREPARE AND DISPLAY PETIT FOURS (PF)
The learner
The learner
1. Characteristics of classical
demonstrates
demonstrate
and contemporary petit fours
understanding of
competencies in
the basic
preparing and
2. Underlying principles in
concept and
displaying petit
preparing petit fours
underlying
fours
theories in
3. Types and kinds of sponge
preparing and
and bases
displaying petit
fours
4. Different kinds of fillings
33. Storage temperature for
cakes
32. Storage methods for cakes
31. Factors to consider in storing
cakes
CONTENT
STANDARD
EP
E
D
30. Standards and procedures
of storing cake products
CONTENT
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
TLE_HEBP912PF-IVa-b12
TLE_HEBP912TC-IIIj-11
CODE
xviii
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
7. Kinds of small choux paste
8. Types of sweet paste and
fillings
9. Different garnishes, glazes
and finishes
10. Standards and operating
procedures in preparing fresh
petit fours
CONTENT
STANDARD
EP
E
D
6. Decorations and designs
CONTENT
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
D
LEARNING
COMPETENCIES
2.3 Prepare and use
fillings the required flavors
2.2 Prepare and blend
baked sweet paste in
accordance with
establishment standards
and procedures
PY
2.1 Bake and decorate a
selection of small choux
paste shapes in
accordance with
established standards and
procedures
LO 2. Prepare fresh petit
fours
1.4 Design and use
decorations in accordance
with establishment
standards and procedures
following required
temperature and standard
procedure
C
O
PERFORMANCE
STANDARD
TLE_HEBP912PF-IVc-d13
CODE
xix
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
13. Specifications of fresh fruits
needed to caramelized
CONTENT
STANDARD
EP
E
D
11. Flavor and shape
specifications and enterprise
standards of quality marzipan
12. Standards and operating
procedures in coating marzipan
fruits
CONTENT
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
D
C
O
PERFORMANCE
STANDARD
LO 4. Prepare
caramelized petit fours
4.1. Select and coat fresh
fruits/fruit segments with
preserve desired eating
characteristics and
softened with egg whites,
piped into shapes and
sealed/browned with
applied heat, according to
enterprise practice
PY
Quality marzipan to
produce mini-sized fruits in
accordance with enterprise
and client requirements
LO 3. Prepare marzipan
petit fours
2.4 Use garnishes, glazes
and finished in accordance
with established standards
and procedures
and correct consistency
LEARNING
COMPETENCIES
TLE_HEBP912PF-IVg-h15
TLE_HEBP912PF-IVe-f14
CODE
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
xx
20. Temperature requirements
in storing petit fours
19. Tips on storing petit fours
18. Standards and procedures in
displaying petit fours
17. Tips on how to display petit
fours
16. Kinds and uses of
receptacles for petit fours
CONTENT
STANDARD
EP
E
D
14. Specifications of dried fruits
needed.
15. Kinds of sugar to
caramelized
CONTENT
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
D
C
O
PERFORMANCE
STANDARD
LO 6. Store petit fours
6.1 Store petit fours in
proper temperatures and
conditions to maintain
maximum eating qualities,
appearance and freshness
PY
5.2. Display petit fours
creatively to enhance
customer appeal
4.2. Fill sandwich dried
fruits or nuts with flavored
marzipan and coated with
pale amber-colored
caramel according to
specifications and
enterprise standards
LO 5. Display petit fours
5.1. Select and prepare
appropriate receptacles for
petit fours
pale amber-colored
caramel or glazed or any
coating specified by the
enterprise
LEARNING
COMPETENCIES
TLE_HEBP912PF-IVi-17
TLE_HEBP912PF-IVi-16
CODE
xxi
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
6. Standard Operating Procedures
in preparing other types of
desserts
5. Standard recipe specifications
of specialized cakes and other
types of desserts
4. Portion control and yield
3. Culinary terms related to
specialized cakes and other types
of desserts
Quarter 4
LESSON 2: PRESENT DESSERTS (PD)
1. Varieties and characteristics of
The learner
specialized cakes, both classical
demonstrates
and contemporary and other types
understanding of
of desserts
the basic
concept and
2. Commodity knowledge,
underlying
including quality indicators of
theories in
specialized cakes and other types
presenting
of desserts
desserts
CONTENT
STANDARD
EP
E
D
21. Standards and procedures in
storing and packaging petit fours
CONTENT
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
D
C
O
The learner
demonstrate
competencies in
presenting
desserts
PERFORMANCE
STANDARD
PY
1.2. Plate and decorate
desserts in accordance
with enterprise standards
and procedures
LO 1. Present and serve
plated desserts
1.1. Portion and present
desserts according to
product items, occasion
and enterprise standards
and procedures
6.2 Package petit fours in
accordance with
established standards and
procedures
LEARNING
COMPETENCIES
TLE_HEBP912PD-IVj-18
CODE
xxii
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
10. Packaging design
techniques
11. Standards and procedures in
storing and packaging desserts
9. Temperature range in storing
desserts
CONTENT
STANDARD
EP
E
D
7. Planning, preparing and
presenting trolley services
8. Arranging and preparing
variety of desserts
CONTENT
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
D
C
O
PERFORMANCE
STANDARD
3.2 Package desserts in
accordance with
established standards and
procedures
PY
LO 3. Store and package
desserts
3.1 Store desserts in
accordance with the
required temperature and
customer’s specifications.
2.2 Prepare and arrange
variety of desserts in
accordance with enterprise
standards and procedures
LO 2. Plan, prepare and
present dessert buffet
selection or plating
2.1 Plan and utilize dessert
buffet services according
to available facilities,
equipment and
customer/enterprise
requirements
LEARNING
COMPETENCIES
TLE_HEBP912PD-IVj-20
TLE-HEBP912PD-IVj-19
CODE
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
PY
Quarter 1
Overview
D
C
O
Baking is cooking by dry heat in an oven or oven-type
appliance. It is a method of cooking used in making breads,
cakes, pies, pastries, and biscuits which everybody enjoys
eating. Baking is an enjoyable activity which you can learn
either as a hobby or as an income-generating project.
D
EP
E
This module will give you knowledge of the different
bakery products and provide you hands-on experience in
baking, from the basic biscuits to the more complex cookies,
muffins, and breads.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Definition of Terms
Baking Terminologies
As you wish to pursue baking as a career, you should familiarize yourself with
the common preparation and baking terminologies that come across in the process.
a substance having a sour or sharp flavor
Bake
to cook food in a dry heat method inside an oven
Batter
a mixture of flours with liquids such as water, milk, or eggs
used to prepare various foods
Blend
to combine ingredients and produce a homogenous mixture
Coat
to cover with a thin layer of flour, sugar, nuts, batter, etc.
Contamination
the state of being contaminated
Chill
to refrigerate, to reduce the temperature of food
Dough
a soft, thick mass or mixture of dry ingredients (e.g., flour or
meal), and liquid (e.g., water) that is kneaded, shaped, and
baked into bread or pastry
C
O
D
EP
E
Dust
PY
Acid
sprinkle the surface with flour to avoid mixture to stick to it
consists of beaten eggs sometimes mixed with a liquid, usually
water or milk, which is brushed onto the bread or pastry
Fermentation
the process of converting sugar into alcohol to produce carbon
dioxide
D
Egg wash
Foaming
to continuously beat egg white to incorporate air until it
becomes light and fluffy
Gluten
a substance responsible
characteristics of dough
Grease
to brush pan with shortening
Knead
to press, stretch, and fold the dough until gluten is developed
Line
to put a grease proof paper on the baking pans or sheets
2
for
the
elastic
and
sticky
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
a mixture used as a dessert or a topping made of beaten egg
whites and sugar until smooth, light and fluffy, usually added
with cream of tartar to make it stable
Mise En Place
French term means “put in place” that includes assembling all
the necessary ingredients, equipment, and tools and serving
pieces needed to prepare food
Mix
to combine ingredients in any way that make distribution of
ingredients evenly
Pre-heat
to heat the oven prior to baking to achieve the required heat
Punch down
to deflate the dough to expel carbon dioxide produced during
the fermentation process to give it a second chance to rise
Scrape
to remove sticky ingredients from the side of the mixing bowl
Stir in
to add another ingredient into the mixture
Syrup
a thick sticky solution of sugar and water
Whip
to beat rapidly and continuously to aid incorporation of air as in
whipping egg whites to make meringue and cream
C
O
PY
Meringue
microorganisms that produce carbon dioxide gas when it
mixes with carbohydrates, causing the dough to rise
D
EP
E
Yeast
D
Work simplification performance of a task in the most efficient way possible
3
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Pre-assessment
What do you already know?
PY
Let us determine how much you already know about Bread and
Pastry Production. Take this test.
Read and analyze the statement carefully. Choose the best answer and write the
letter only in your answer sheet.
C
O
1. Which of the following ingredients is usually used in dough that gives better
taste and flavor?
A. butter
B. compound lard
C. edible tallow
D. vegetables oil
EP
E
D
2. What kind of sugar is primarily used in preparing icing?
A. brown sugar
B. confectioner’s sugar
C. granulated sugar
D. refined sugar
3. What is the basic ingredient in baking that improves aroma, flavor, and
nutrition in baked products?
A. baking powder
B. flour
C. shortening
D. sugar
D
4. Which of the ingredients is an example of a physical leavening agent?
A. air
B. baking powder
C. baking soda
D. yeast
5. Which kind of flour contains more gluten and less starch?
A. all-purpose flour
B. bread flour
C. cake flour
D. soft-flour
4
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
6. Which among the choices is a personal cleanliness practice in baking?
A. combing the hair in the working area
B. keeping fingernails long
C. washing the hands after work
D. wearing an apron during working hours
7. What is the first step to have better results in baking?
A. keeping oneself clean
B. keeping the food and equipment clean
C. keeping the utensils and work area clean
D. all of the above
PY
8. What is the best step to have better results in baking?
A. Measure ingredients accurately.
B. Memorize the recipe very well.
C. Use modern equipment.
D. Use only imported ingredients.
C
O
9. How many cups is equivalent to one gallon?
A. 3
B. 5
C. 10
D. 16
D
10. What is the proper way to measure flour accurately?
A. level off with the use of the tines of a fork
B. shakes the measuring cup before levelling
C. shovel the flour
D. sift it before measuring
EP
E
11. Which of the following is the best substitute for sour milk?
A. 1 C sweet milk plus 1 tbsp. vinegar
B. 1¾ C sweet milk plus 1 tbsp. vinegar
C. 2 C sweet milk plus ½ tbsp. vinegar
D. 2/3 C sweet milk plus 1 tbsp. vinegar
D
12. What is the best substitute for one cup sifted flour?
A. 1 C minus 1 tbsp. sifted all = purpose flour
B. 1 C minus 2 tbsp. sifted all = purpose flour
C. 1 C plus 2 tbsp. sifted all = purpose flour
D. 1 C sifted all-purpose flour
13. Which of the following flour mixture is thick enough to be rolled and kneaded?
A. batter
B. cream
C. crust
D. dough
5
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
14. It refers to the procedure of rubbing one or two ingredients against a bowl
with the tip of a wooden spoon or electric mixer.
A. beating
B. creaming
C. folding
D. stirring
PY
15. Which of the following pastries refer to small, flat, and sweet cakes?
A. biscuits
B. cookies
C. muffins
D. pies
C
O
16. Which among the following cookies needs freezing before it is cut into
desired shapes before baking?
A. cookie bar
B. pressed cookie
C. refrigerated cookie
D. rolled cookie
D
17. Which type of mixing technique is done only in baking bread?
A. blending
B. creaming
C. folding
D. kneading
EP
E
18. It refers to the process of putting your product into containers for easy
distribution?
A. labeling
B. packaging
C. storing
D. wrapping
D
19. It is one of the more innovative methods used in commercial food packaging.
A. canned package
B. chill packaging
C. foil packaging
D. freezing packaging
20. What storing technique is used to draw, fold and cover the bakery product?
A. chilling
B. folding
C. refrigerate
D. wrapping
6
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Lesson 1: PREPARE AND PRODUCE BAKERY PRODUCTS
EXPECTED OUTCOMES:
At the end of this Lesson, you should be able to:
PY
LO 1. Prepare bakery products
LO 2. Decorate and present bakery products
LO 3. Store bakery products


EP
E


Select, measure, and weigh required ingredients according to recipe or
production requirements.
Prepare a variety of bakery products according to standard. Mixing
procedures/ formulation/ recipes and desired product characteristics
Use appropriate equipment according to required bakery products and
standard operating procedures.
Bake bakery products according to techniques and appropriate conditions
Select required oven temperature to bake goods in accordance with the
desired characteristics, standards recipe specifications.
D

C
O
LO 1. Prepare bakery products
D
What do you need to know?
Read Lesson Information closely and find out how much you can
remember. Then do Self-check 1.1.1 to know how much you have
learned.
7
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Lesson Information
A. Measurement of Dry and Liquid Ingredients
PY
Techniques in Measuring and Weighing Ingredients Used in Baking
It is important to measure the ingredients accurately to get standard products
and efficient use of materials. Different flour in different localities need varying
amounts of liquid and this should be considered in baking.
Keep a record of the quantity of flour used each time you bake to find out
which measurement produces the best result from the flour available in your area.
You will soon learn to judge the correct amount of liquid to add by the
consistency of the dough and the way it handles.
D
EP
E
D
C
O
1. Dry Ingredients
A. Flour
a. Sift the flour to remove lumps.
b. Spoon sifted flour lightly into a measuring cup heaping it well over
the top of the cup. Do not shake the cup.
c. Level off the cup with a straight-edged utensils or spatula.
d. For fractions of a cup, use the lines indicating ¼, ⅓, and ½ of the
standard measuring cup.
B. Sugar
a. White sugar needs sifting only if lumpy. Proceed as in the
measurement of flour.
b. Brown sugar, if lumpy, press through a coarse sieve to crush the
lumps. Pack into measuring cup just enough to hold its shape. Level
off.
c. Sift confectioner’s sugar through a sieve to remove lumps. Spoon
lightly into measuring cup. Level off with spatula or any straightedged utensil. Do not shake the cup.
C. Baking Powder, Soda, Salt and Spices
a. Fill measuring spoon with the desired ingredients. Level off with a
spatula or any straight-edged utensils. If baking powder has caked,
stir lightly before measuring.
D. Shortening
a. With the use of measuring cup
Have shortening at room temperature. Pack firmly into the
measuring cup, taking care not to have air pockets. Level off with a
spatula or any straight – edged utensils. Use standard
measuring spoon for less than ¼ cup shortening.
b. Water Displacement Method
Fill the cup with cold water up to ¼ cup level if ½ cup of fat is
desired and add shortening enough to cause the water to rise up
to the 1 cup mark. To measure ¼ cup, fill with cold water up to ¾
cup level and add shortening enough to raise the water up to the1
cup mark. Drain well.
8
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
2. Liquid Ingredients
Water and Milk
1 cup margarine
1 square
1 oz sweetened chocolate
=
¼ cup cocoa + 1 ½ to 2 tsp shortening
8 – 10 pcs graham crackers
4 oz bread
=
=
1 cup graham crumbs
3 cups soft crumbs
1 cup milk
1 cup cake flour
=
=
1 tablespoon cornstarch
1 cup sour milk
=
=
1 cup whipping cream
1 whole egg
1 cup molasses
=
=
=
½ cup evaporated milk ½ cup water
1 cup all-purpose flour – 2T + 2T cornstarch
(both sifted before measuring)
2 tablespoon flour
1 cup evaporated milk +
1 T vinegar or lemon juice
¾ cup whole milk + ¼ cup butter
2 egg yolks
1 cup honey
C
O
PY
1 cup butter
=
1 oz baking chocolate (unsweetened) =
EP
E
D
A liquid measuring cup is best to use for liquid ingredients because it is clear
and see through. It also has a spout that makes pouring of liquids easy.
To get the exact amount, follow these steps when measuring liquids.
1. Set up the liquid measuring cup. Place the measuring cup on a flat, even
surface.
2. Pour the liquid carefully and slowly into the cup. Stop pouring when the liquid
reaches the marker line for the desired amount.
3. Check your measurement. Bend down so that your eyes level with the marker
line. Look at the top of the liquid.
Frequently Used Substitutions and Equivalents
D
Equivalent Weights and Measurement
Given Measurement
Equivalents
1 gallon (gal.)
4 quarts
1 quart (qt.)
2 pints
1 pint (pt.)
2 cups
1 cup (c)
8 fluid ounces
½ cup
4 ounces
¼ cup
2 ounces
⅛ cup
1 fluid ounce
1 tablespoon
3 teaspoons
1 pound
16 ounces
2.2 pounds
35.2 ounces
1 kilogram
1000 grams
9
Abbreviations
gallon gal.
quart qt.
pint pt.
cup c.
tablespoon tbsp. or T
teaspoon tsp. or t
fluid ounce fl. oz.
ounce oz.
pound lb.
gram g.
kilogram kg.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Self-Check 1.1
Something to do
PY
Listed below are the ingredients for brownies.
 2 oz. chocolate, melted
2 eggs, beaten
 1/3 c butter
1 c butter
 1 c cake flour
½ tsp vanilla
 ¼ tsp salt
1 c nuts, chopped
 ½ tsp baking powder
D
C
O
A. Assume that you do not have a measuring cup. Give the required
measurement for every ingredient that is equivalent to the cup
measurement.
B. Give the substitute for every ingredients marked with bullet (•)
EP
E
Activity 1.1.1
Demonstrate in class on the proper way of measuring ingredients for brownies.
D
Check the accuracy of your answers. Review the table of equivalents and
substitution of ingredients before submitting your work. Master the procedure in
measuring ingredients before proceeding to the actual demonstration. You will be
evaluated in this task on the basis of the following criteria:
Correctness of procedure
Accuracy of measurement
Sanitation
Total
-
10
40%
40 %
20 %
100 %
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
What do you need to know?
Read Lesson Information closely and then find how much you can
remember. Then do Self-Check 1.1.2 to see how much you have
learned.
PY
Lesson Information
Major Ingredients in Baking
FLOUR
Flour is a finely ground meal obtained by grinding and milling cereal grains or
other root crops. Flour is most commonly made from wheat and when the
word "flour" is used without qualification, it usually implies wheat flour.
However, flour also can be made from many other grasses and non-grain
plants, such as rye, barley, maize (corn), rice, potatoes, and other foods.
Wheat contains protein. When mixed with water, these proteins form as
gluten. The more protein a flour has, the stronger the gluten strength.
D
C
O
I.
D
EP
E
A. Types of Flour
Flour can be classified as to hard flour or soft flour.
1. Hard flour or bread flour is high in gluten, with 12-14% protein content,
and has strongest gluten strength.
2. Bread flour has 12-14% protein content and is made from hard wheat
flour. The high gluten content causes the bread to rise and gives its
shape and structure.
3. All-purpose flour has 10-11% protein content and is made from a blend of
hard and soft wheat flours, also called the General Purpose Flour or
family flour.
4. Soft flour is comparatively low in gluten and so results in a finer texture.
Soft flour is usually made into cake flour, which is the lowest in gluten
content, and pastry flour, which has slightly more gluten than cake flour.
5. Cake flour has 7-9% protein content and is made from soft wheat flour. It
is good for making cakes and cookies where a tender and delicate texture
is desired.
B. Uses of Flour
1. Provides structure, texture and color to baked products
2. Provides nutritive value to baked products
3. Used as thickening agent
4. Used as binder of food
5. Used as stiffening agent in laundry
11
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
D. Properties/Characteristics of flour
1. whitish color
2. tolerance
3. strength
4. uniformity
5. high absorption
SUGAR
Sugar is a sweet, soluble organic compound that belongs to the
carbohydrate group of food. They are the simplest to digest among all
carbohydrates.
C
O
II.
PY
C. Storage of Flour
Most types of flour keep well in a sealed container in a cool, dry
location. The original paper packaging used for many types of flour is good
for long term storage as long as the package has not been opened. Once
opened, the shelf life decreases. Many types of flour are now marketed in
resealable plastic bags that increase shelf life.
EP
E
D
A. Types of Sugar
1. Regular granulated sugar or white sugar - also known as table sugar or
as refined sugar.
2. Confectioner’s sugar or powdered sugar - granulated sugar that has been
pulverized. To prevent lumping and caking, about 3% cornstarch is
added.
3. Brown sugar - contains caramel, mineral matter and moisture. It also
contains a small amount of molasses. It comes in three colors.
D
B. Effects of Sugar in Baking
o increases dough development
o makes the color of the crust richer
o improves the nutritive value, flavor and aroma of the product
o makes the bread more tender
o increase the volume of the loaf
o serves as food for the yeast
o contributes to moisture content of baked products, increasing its
storing quality
o acts as creaming agent
III.
EGGS
Eggs are considered a complete protein, containing all the essential
amino acids humans use to build other proteins needed by the body. Both the
yolk and the egg white contain protein, so whole eggs or their separated
components may be used to set liquids.
They represent almost 50% of the total cost of any baked product,
thus considered the baking ingredient with the highest cost or expense.
12
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
PY
A. Uses of Eggs in Baking
1. Eggs, as well as flour, are the structural ingredients in baking.
2. Eggs provide leavening; add color, texture, flavor and richness to the
batter; and act as stabilizer in mixture that inherently wants to separate
into its two parts, like oil and water. They are very important in helping to
bind all the other ingredients together.
3. Beaten eggs are used as leavening agents as they incorporate air into the
batter, which will expand in the oven and cause the cake to rise.
4. Eggs are used as thickening agent.
5. Egg washes are brushed on many baked goods to create a golden shiny
top. The egg white provides luster and the egg yolk color.
6. Egg whites are used to make meringues.
SHORTENING
Shortening is any fat, which, when added to flour mixtures increases
tenderness. This is done by preventing the sticking of gluten strands while
mixing so that gluten is shortened and makes the product tender.
D
IV.
C
O
B. Composition of Egg
1. Mucin - protein which is found in egg whites and responsible for its gel
characteristic.
2. Ovalbumin - another protein found in egg whites which coagulates and
involve both in heat coagulation and whipping.
3. Lecithin- present in egg yolk which is responsible for its emulsifying
property. It is the portion of the egg yolk that causes spoilage when eggs
are stored at warm temperature.
D
EP
E
A. Examples of Shortening
1. Oil – made from plant products such as corn, cottonseeds, soybeans,
peanuts, and other sources. As a rule, you can substitute oil for melted
shortening. Among produced oils, corn oil and vegetable oils are
commonly used in baking. Unless specified in the recipe, olive oil should
not be used in baking.
2. Butter – made of fatty milk proteins. It contains 80-85 % fat; 10-15 %
water and 5% milk solids. When used in baking, it contributes flavor and
tenderness. Butter remains solid when refrigerated, but softens to a
spreadable consistency at room temperature, and melts to a thin liquid
consistency at 32-35°C (90-95 °F).
3. Margarine – made from hydrogenated vegetable oil. It contains 80-85
percent fat, 10-15 percent water and 5 percent salt. The hydrogenation
process makes oil a solid.
4. Lard – made of fat from pork. Some people prefer lard to other fats for
making pie crust and biscuits because it gives a flakier texture.
5. Cocoa Butter – the ivory-colored natural fat of the cocoa beans extracted
during the manufacturing of chocolate and cocoa powder. It gives
chocolate its creamy, smooth, melt-in-your-mouth texture.
13
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
B. Uses of Shortening in Baking
1. Makes bread products tender and improve flavor.
2. Assist in gas retention giving better volume and crust.
3. Prevent the cohesion of gluten.
4. Improve the aroma, color and texture of baked products.
5. Improve the shelf life of baked products because of its moisture.
LEAVENING AGENT
Leavening agents are gases that cause the dough to rise. In the
presence of moisture, heat, and others, the leavening agent reacts to
produce gas (often carbon dioxide) that becomes trapped as bubbles within
the dough. When a dough or batter is baked, it "sets" and the holes left by the
gas bubbles remain. This is what gives breads, cakes, and other baked
goods to rise and increase in volume.
A. Classification of Leavening Agents
PY
V.
C
O
1. Chemical Leaveners. Chemical leaveners are chemical mixtures or
compounds that release gases, usually carbon dioxide. Chemical
leaveners are used in quick breads and cakes, as well as cookies.
EP
E
D
Examples of chemical leaveners is
a. Baking Soda - otherwise known as bicarbonate of soda, or Sodium
Bicarbonate. It is a chemical salt with diverse practical uses. It is a
powerful leavener that readily reacts as soon as it comes in contact
with batter or dough.
b. Baking Powder – is a combination of baking soda and acid salt.
c. Cream of tartar - is tartaric acid and is a fine white crystalline acid
salt which is a by-product of the wine-making industry. It is used in
the whipping of egg whites to stabilize them and allow them to reach
maximum volume.
2. Biological Leaveners. Yeast is a living organism, neither plant nor
D
animal. Yeasts belong to a separate kingdom in taxonomy, the fungus
kingdom. Leavening with yeast is a process based on fermentation, the
process of converting sugar to alcohol and to carbon dioxide.
Types of Yeast
 Dry or granular
 Compressed or cake type
 Instant
VI.
LIQUID INGREDIENTS
Liquid ingredients provide moisture to rehydrate and activate the
yeast and bring together the flour and any other dry ingredients to make the
dough. It also improves the formation of gluten strands during the kneading of
dough.
14
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
The following are some types of the liquid ingredients used in baking:
A. Water
It is the cheapest liquid used in baking. It performs vital role in baking
making ingredients rehydrated. The right amount of water helps dissolve all
other ingredients in batter and in dough to form smooth, workable mixture. In
that way, water acts as a binding agent for any baked products.
1. Types of Milk Used in Baking
fresh milk or whole milk
evaporated milk
condensed milk
skimmed milk
powder or dry milk
C
O
•
•
•
•
•
PY
B. Milk and Other Dairy Products
Milk and cream, like water, moisten dough and batters. Unlike water,
they add a slight flavor to the final baked good and increase its richness. Milk
and cream also create a fuller, moister texture in baked goods and help them
brown on the surface. They also contribute to the nutritive value of baked
goods.
2. Uses of Milk in Baking
EP
E
•
•
•
•
increases nutritive value of baked products
enhances texture and increase softness of baked goods
acts as a strengthener when mixed with flour, because it helps in the
formation of gluten, which gives a baked item structure
provides moisture and tenderness to baked goods
enhances flavor
extends the shelf life of a cake
boosts crust color
D
•
•
•
Minor Ingredients in Baking
D
They are not as important as the major ingredients in baking but they are
essential in attaining the sensory qualities of baked products. They are used in small
quantity, but contribute to the enhancement of flavor and texture of the baked
products. These are the ingredients that add distinction and character to baked
goods.
1. Flavoring
2. Vanilla
3. Salt
4. Spices (cloves, cinnamon, mace, nutmeg)
5. Wines
6. Coffee
7. Chocolate and Cocoa
15
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Types of Chocolate
1. Unsweetened Chocolate
2. Bittersweet and Semisweet Chocolate
3. Milk Chocolate
PY
Self-check 1.1.2
EP
E
Something to do
D
Activity 1.1.2
C
O
Give what is asked for in the following.
A. Six major ingredients in baking.
B. Minor ingredients used in baking (4)
C. Effects of sugar in baking (5)
1. Have a tasting exercise. Taste a pan de sal, hotcake,
and siopao. Identify the ingredients used for each item.
Write your answers in your notebook.
D
2. Prepare a basic recipe of griddle bread. Divide the mixture
into four cups: to the first cup, add vanilla; to the second
cup, add lemon; to the third cup, add cinnamon; and leave
the fourth cup plain.

Evaluate your product according to texture, flavor, and
smell. Which bread has the best texture, flavor, and smell?
Use the following criteria:
Correctness of procedure------ 40 %
Accuracy of measurement----- 40 %
Sanitation -------------------------- 20 %
TOTAL 100 %
16
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
What do you need to know?
Read Lesson Information closely and then find out how much you
can remember. Then do Self-check 1.1.3 to know how much you
have learned.
PY
Lesson Information
SANITATION
C
O
Sanitation means keeping bacteria down to a small number as possible
through personal hygiene and proper food handling. It also means keeping the food
at the appropriate temperature so bacteria already present do not have a chance to
multiply.
D
Sanitary measures include personal hygiene, keeping food, equipment and
the work area clean. Unsanitary practices and improper handling of food may result
to food contamination or infection, poisoning and death.
EP
E
Workers Personal Hygiene



D

Remove jewelries and accessories before starting to work.
Hands should be clean and nails cut short.
Use the appropriate work outfit. People who work in the kitchen should wear
suitable, clean and freshly ironed aprons. Aprons protect the body from burns
and scalds and from food stain. Headbands are used to prevent loose hair
from dropping into the food and also absorb sweat on head.
Keep sick persons out of the kitchen.
Facilities



Sanitize all laboratory equipment, tools and utensils thoroughly before and
after use.
Air dry all equipment, tools and utensils to avoid build up of dust and rust
corrosion.
Dispose of garbage properly everyday so as not to invite rodents and insects.
17
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Practical Ways of Keeping Food Clean


Food should be handled with clean hands.
Avoid sneezing and coughing when handling food.
Utensils that fall on the floor should be washed well before using them again.
Store food supplies in a clean, dry place to maintain its freshness.
Clean cans, bottles and bags containing ingredients before opening.
Keep dry and liquid ingredients in a sealed container. Check for its safety
from time to time.
Separate fresh vegetables from old ones before storing.
Keep food at a suitable temperature. Bacteria multiply fastest between 15°C
and 52°C (60°F and 125°F). Keep hot food hot until served. "Hot" means
above 60°C (140°F), where bacteria can no longer grow. Keep cold food cold
until served. "Cold" means below 4°C (40°F), at refrigerator temperature or
below.
Keep the floor area clean and free from waste, water and grease.
Keep cabinets dry, clean and closed tightly to keep away rodents and insects.
Check and clean the dishwashing area whenever needed.
Clean the tables after using them.
D




C
O
Keeping the Work Laboratory Area Clean
PY






Safety Precautions in the Kitchen
EP
E
Observance of safety precautions promote work efficiency and prevent
accidents. Occasionally, accidents do happen. It is important that you keep calm so
you can take proper actions. Accidents are caused either by people themselves or by
hazardous environment or defective equipment.
Factors that Contribute to Successful Baking
D
Baking requires accuracy. Any deviation from the measurement, procedure,
and type of ingredient may greatly affect the baked products. Beginners in baking
should observe the correct practices in preparation to achieve the desired results.
The Use of Quality Ingredients
Always use high quality dry and liquid ingredients, minor baking ingredients,
shortening and fresh eggs. Use ingredients indicated in the recipe. Refrain from
substituting ingredients.
18
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
The Use of Appropriate Tools and Utensils
Utilize standard measuring cups, glass and spoons for best results. Mixing
bowls should be large enough to allow proper mixing of ingredients to produce dough
and batter. Use a pastry blender or two knives when cutting shortening into flour.
Appropriate use of tools and utensils promote work efficiency and
effectiveness.
Following Correct Procedures


EP
E

PY

C
O

Study and follow the recipe accurately. It is important to understand the
recipe first then to assemble all the needed ingredients, tools and utensils
before starting to bake. Follow the step-by-step procedure accurately.
Pre-heat the oven. If a thermostat is defective or not available use an oven
thermometer to check the baking temperature.
Measure ingredients accurately. Do not change the specified amount of
ingredients. Any change in the amount of ingredients may result in failure to
achieve the desired effect or expected consistency of the mixture.
Observe correct hand and mixing techniques. Wrong mixing techniques such
as over-mixing, under-mixing, under-beating, or overbeating of eggs, and
insufficient creaming will result in poorly baked goods.
Make use of the type of pan specified in the recipe. Measure its length, width,
and inside depth. Find out in the recipe if the pan(s) should or should not be
greased or lined with wax paper.
Follow the specified baking time and temperature stated in the recipe. Place
the baking pan at the center of the oven and avoid opening the oven door
until baking is done.
D

D
Self-check 1.1.3
Arrange the following procedures in baking. Use A for the first step, B for
second and so on. Write your answer in your test notebook.
______1. Pre-heat the oven.
______2. Follow the specified baking time and temperature.
______3. Make use of the type of pan specified in the recipe.
______4. Observe correct hand and mixing techniques.
______5. Study and follow the recipe accurately.
______6. Measure ingredients accurately.
19
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Activity 1.1.3
Something to Do
Field Trip to a Bake Shop
Comprehensiveness
Thorough and
comprehensive
explanation
Relevance
Highly relevant
3
Generally clear
and quite easy
to understand
2
Lacks clarity
and difficult to
understand
C
O
4
Exceptionally
clear and easy
to understand
Substantial
Explanation
Partial or not
comprehensive
Explanation
Generally
relevant
Somewhat
relevant
1
Unclear cannot
be understand
Misunderstanding
or serious
misconception on
the explanation
Irrelevant
EP
E
D
CRITERIA
Clarity
PY
In a field trip to a baking shop, observe the following:
1. How do the bakers work?
2. Do they practice cleanliness and sanitation?
3. Write a narrative report of your observation.
4. You will present your output in class. You will be rated on the following criteria:
What do you need to know?
D
Read Lesson Information closely and find out how much you can
remember. Then do the Self-check 1.1.4 to know how much you have
learned.
20
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson Information
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Baking Tools, Utensils and Equipment in Making Bread,
Cookies, Muffins and Biscuits
Baking is a sophisticated method of cooking food. It requires special tools
and equipment in order to bring out the best results.
PY
To prepare for baking, familiarize yourself with the following baking tools,
utensils and equipment classified according to their use.
MEASURING UTENSILS
C
O
LIQUID-MEASURING CUP - a
transparent cup calibrated to indicate
the amount of liquid.
EP
E
D
DRY-MEASURING CUP - is a set of
marked cups used to measure dry
ingredients such as flour and sugar.
They are either made of plastic,
aluminum, or stainless steel.
D
MEASURING SPOONS - a set of
spoons used to measure small
amounts of ingredients.
DIETETIC SCALE - is an instrument
used to measure the weight of the
items or ingredients.
21
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
MIXING, BLENDING, and CUTTING UTENSILS
DOUGH CUTTER - a tool with a sharp
edge used to cut dough.
C
O
PY
FLOUR SIFTER - used in sifting
coarse or dry ingredients such as flour
and sugar.
EP
E
D
ELECTRIC MIXER - a motor powered
device used to stir and blend mixtures
used in baking.
D
Grater - tool used to grate food into
finer form.
MIXING BOWL - a hollow dish where
ingredients for baking are mixed.
22
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
ROLLING PIN - a solid elongated
wood with handles at both ends that is
used to flatten dough or pastry.
C
O
PY
ROTARY EGG BEATER - a handheld device for beating eggs, cream,
and other liquids.
D
RUBBER SCRAPER - a tool used, for
mixing and scraping mixture on the
side of a bowl.
EP
E
SPATULA - a flat, thin and blunt metal
used for leveling-off dry ingredients
and spreading icing and frosting on
cakes.
D
WOODEN SPOON - a tool used for
mixing and stirring flour mixtures.
23
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
BAKING UTENSILS
OVEN - an equipment used for
baking, heating, or drying foods
C
O
D
MUFFIN PAN - an aluminum
rectangular or square pan with hallow
rounded
PY
BAKING PAN- an aluminum or
tempered glass dish, rectangular or
square in form used for baking cakes
D
EP
E
COOKIE or BAKING SHEET - is a
flat aluminum sheet used for baking
cookies
Self-Check 1.1.4
Something to do
1. Your teacher will put a number on each of the baking tools, utensils and
equipment. Your task is to identify and classify them.
2. Select one tool and/or equipment. Demonstrate in class its proper use and
care.
24
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Rubrics for scoring
Point
5
4
3
2
PY
1
Observed the proper way of demonstrating proper use of tool and
equipment with no mistake.
Observed the proper way of demonstrating proper use of tool and
equipment with 1 mistake.
Observed the proper way of demonstrating proper use of tool and
equipment with 2 mistakes.
Observed the proper way of demonstrating proper use of tool and
equipment with 3 mistakes.
Observed the proper way of demonstrating proper use of tool and
equipment with 4 mistakes.
C
O
What do you need to know?
EP
E
D
Read Lesson Information closely and find out how much can you
remember. Then do Self-check 1.1.5 to know how much you have
learned.
Lesson Information
Types, Kinds and Classification of Bakery Products
D
Preparing bakery products requires no trick but adequate mastery of the
processes in baking. This module will provide you hands-on experience in baking.
Baking has become not just a favorite past time or hobby but a highly profitable
business.
Bread is one of the most popular and best sold baked products, not only in our
country but in other countries as well. Many countries have bread as their staple
food.
There are different kinds of bread. Whatever kind of bread is eaten, people
remember it for its quality. It is by maintaining good quality that popular bakeries or
bread houses keep their customers.
25
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
The quality of bread is affected by the type of ingredients used, the manner the
dough is mixed or prepared, and the temperature maintained during baking.
PY
Kinds of Dough in Baking Bread
Dough used in baking bread is classified into two:
 Lean dough. The Basic ingredients for bread which include flour, yeast, salts,
a little sugar, and shortening make up the lean dough. This dough is made up
into Pan de sal, Pan Amerikano, French bread, and other crusty bread
varieties.
 Rich dough. Aside from the basic ingredients for bread, rich dough has butter,
nuts, fruits, eggs, and condiments. Milk is often used, too. Rich dough also
uses more sugar. This dough is used in making rolls, coffee cakes, and the
sweet bread varieties.
Methods of Mixing Dough
D
C
O
Straight method - This method combines all the ingredients together at one time to
make the dough. The dough is kneaded and set aside to rise.
Sponge and dough method - This method mixes part of the liquid, flour, and all of
the yeast to make a soft mixture which is set aside to rise until bubbly. Then,
the remaining ingredients are added and the mixture is treated as straight
dough.
EP
E
Bread products can also be prepared using batter instead of dough. Preparation of
this type of bread is faster since there is no dough to knead and shape. However, the
texture of the finished product is not as fine as that of kneaded dough.
D
Characteristics of a Well-Made Bread
Bread of high quality is characterized by the following:
1. It is large for its weight, well-rounded top, and free from cracks and bulges.
2. The crust is thin with an even golden brown color.
3. It has fine and even grain, elongated cells, and thin cell wall making the crumb
smooth, soft, elastic, and creamy white with a silken sheen.
4. It does not crumble easily.
5. It has a sweet and nutty odor, not sour.
Cookies
Cookies are always popular. They are really “little cakes, flat, sweet and
small. They can be made in a variety of shapes and flavors, and can be served in
just as many different ways.
26
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
C
O
PY
Kinds of Cookies
 Drop cookies - are irregular and unevenly shaped. They are made simply by
dropping the cookie batter from a teaspoon to a baking sheet to get the popular
tongue-shaped cookies.
 Rolled cookies - are made from dough which have been rolled out and cut with
cutters to form shapes that fit special occasions such as Christmas, Valentine’s
Day and Easter.
 Pressed or Bagged Cookies – are made with more butter which makes the
finished product richer in taste than the other types of cookies. They are made by
pressing the mixture out of a cookie presser or pastry tube onto the baking sheet,
and at the same time forming it into varied shapes like rings or ribbons.
 Cookie bar- this type of cookie is cut into bars after baking. They are usually
small and square in shape.
 Refrigerated cookies – this type of cookie is frozen and cut into desired shapes
before baking.
D
EP
E
D
Mixing Techniques
Mixing methods greatly affect flour mixtures and its resulting product. Various
techniques have been developed for efficiency and convenience. Some of them are
as follows:
 Creaming - Rubbing one or two ingredients in a bowl with the help of a
wooden spoon or electric mixer to make a soft fluffy mixture. The creamed
mixture should have both smooth and grainy particles.
 Cutting in - Mixing fat and flour with the use of a pastry blender or two knives
in a scissor-like manner. This method cuts fat into small pieces, coating them
with flour to form coarse, granular mixtures for pastries and biscuits.
 Folding - This is working with two ingredients very gently to retain air in the
mixture. It often involves one delicately textured ingredient such as beaten
egg white or whipped cream, which would be reduced to nothing if handled
crudely, and a batter type mix.
 Cut and Fold - A combination of two motions cutting vertically through the
mixture and turning over and over by gliding the spoon or rubber scraper
across the bottom of the mixing bowl at each turn.
 Beating - It is done to incorporate air in a mixture by mechanical agitation. It
could be done with the aid of special gadgets like wire whips, egg beaters or
electric food mixers or with a fork.
 Stirring – It is often done with a wooden spoon, rotating it through a mixture
as long as necessary usually until the ingredients are combined.
 Whipping – It is a process of beating eggs and cream to fill them with air and
make them thick and fluffy.
27
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com

Sifting – It is the process of separating coarse particles in the ingredients by
passing through a sieve. Air is incorporated through this method.
Muffin
Muffins are simple cup breads leavened and are considered a member of
the quick bread family. A variety of quick loaf breads and coffee cakes can be
derived from the basic muffin recipe.
PY
Outside Characteristics of Muffin and Quick Breads
 Shape: Uniform; well-rounded top; free from peaks; no cracks.
 Size: Uniform; large in proportion to weight.
 Color: Uniform golden brown.
 Crust: Tender; pebbled or slightly rough; shiny
C
O
Inside Characteristics of Muffin and Quick Breads
 Color: Creamy white or slightly yellow; free from streaks.
 Grain: Round, even cells; free from tunnels.
 Texture: Tender; moist; light.
 Flavor: Pleasing; well-blended with no bitterness.
D
Biscuits
Biscuits are small flaky quick breads. They are leavened with fast-acting
leaveners which make preparation time shorter than any yeast leavened bread.
D
EP
E
Two Ways to Make Biscuits:
 Using solid fats
Solid fats are cut into the flour with a fork, a pair of knives or a pastry
blender until it coats the flour and is fairly crumbly and mealy.
Liquid is added to make a soft dough and then the mixture is rapidly but
lightly kneaded to evenly distribute the mixture and sufficiently develop the gluten
for flaky product.

Using liquid shortening or “Wet to Dry Method”
Liquid shortening or oil is added to the liquid ingredients and mixed with the dry
ingredients to make soft dough. It is kneaded rapidly but lightly and treated like
the solid fat dough.
Outside Characteristics of Biscuits
 Shape: Uniform; straight sides and level tops on rolled biscuits
 Size: Uniform; twice the size of unbaked biscuits
 Color: Uniform golden brown tops and bottoms—sides lighter; free from
yellow or brown
 Crust: Tender; moderately smooth; free form excess flour
28
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Inside Characteristics of Biscuits




Color: Creamy white; free from yellow or brown spots.
Grain: Flaky, pulling off in thin sheets; medium fine, even cells.
Texture: Tender; slightly moist; light.
Flavor: Pleasing, well-blended with no bitterness.
PY
NOTE: Drop biscuits will be nicely rounded with rough and crisper crust. They
will not be as flaky.
C
O
Self-Check 1.1.5
Cutting-in
Whipping
Cut and Fold
EP
E
Creaming
Beating
Folding
D
RECOGNIZE ME?
Below are statements describing the different mixing techniques used in
producing bakery products. Choose the correct word/term from the box and
write your answer in your test notebook.
Stirring
Sifting
D
_______________ 1. Separating coarse particles in the ingredients by
passing through a sieve.
_______________ 2. Rubbing one or two ingredients in a bowl with the tip
of a wooden spoon or electric mixer.
_______________ 3. Mixing fat and flour using a pastry blender or two
knives in a scissors-like manner.
_______________ 4. Working with two ingredients very gently to retain air
in the mixture.
_______________ 5. Beating egg and creaming to fill with air and make
them thick and fluffy.
29
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
What do you need to know?
Read Lesson Information and find out how much you can remember.
Then do the Self-Check 1.1.6 to know how much you have learned.
PY
Lesson Information
Below is the table which indicates the type of baking products with corresponding
oven temperature and baking time.
Baking Time
425°F to 450°F
400°F to 425°F
400°F to 425°F
350°F to 375°F
400°F
10 to 15 min
30 to 40 min
20 to 25 min
1 to 1 ¼ hr
30 to 40 min
D
C
O
Oven Temperature
350°F to 400°F
375°F
8 to 15 min
8 to 10 min
EP
E
Types of Product
BREADS
Biscuits
Corn bread
Muffins
Quick loaf breads
Yeast bread
COOKIES
Drop
Rolled
D
Activity 1.1.4
The succeeding pages provide recipes for the different types of bakery
products. Divide the class into five groups. Choose a recipe to follow. Each group
should be assigned to bake a particular type of bread, cookies, muffin & biscuits.
No two groups should do the same recipe. There are enough recipes for all the
groups.
30
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Suggested projects
DINNER ROLL
Ingredients
Mixture 1


1 ¼ cup bread flour
∕8 bar butter (softened)
1
Mixture 2


3 tablespoon sugar
½ tablespoon yeast
Mixture 3
¼ cup beaten egg
∕8 tsp iodized salt
PY


1
Mixture 4
Egg wash
C
O

PROCEDURE:
1. In a large mixing bowl, combine bread flour and butter. Mix well. Add the
sugar and yeast. Rub the dry ingredients with your hands until all ingredients
were distributed equally.
D
2. Beat egg and combine to water and salt.
EP
E
3. Pour all liquid ingredients to dry ingredients and mix well. Knead for 15-20
minutes.
4. When the dough is already smooth and elastic and blisters are showing, form
a ball and set aside for 20-25 minutes or until it doubles in size.
D
5. Punch the dough. Flatten and weigh for 45 grams or make it to 7 pieces.
6. Arrange in baking sheet and set aside for 30 minutes or until it increases its
size.
7. Bake for 10-15 minutes in 375°F.
31
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
PAN DE SAL
INGREDIENTS:
1 k bread flour
1 ½ tbsp. instant yeast
¼ cup lukewarm water
200 g brown sugar
2 tbsp.oil
2 tsp rock salt
1 tsp vanilla
150 grams lard
2 cups water
PY









PROCEDURE:
C
O
1. Dissolve yeast in ¼ cup lukewarm water. Sprinkle with 1 tbsp. sugar. Allow to
stand for 8-10 minutes.
2. Combine water, oil, salt and sugar. Stir until salt and sugar are dissolved. Set
aside.
D
3. In a separate bowl, place bread flour and make a well at the center and then
add yeast mixture, and follow the liquid mixture. Mix thoroughly.
EP
E
4. Transfer dough on a floured board and start kneading. Continue kneading
until dough is smooth. (Approximately 25 minutes).
5. Shape into smooth ball and grease all sides with lard. Place in slightly
greased bowl. Cover with damp clean cloth. Allow to rise until double in size,
approximately 1 ½ hours, then punch down dough.
D
6. Cut dough into two, then roll each half into a round log about 30 cm x 2 ½ cm.
7. Cut into 12 equal pieces. Dredge with bread crumbs.
8. Place on greased baking sheets with one side of each piece facing up, about
2½ cm apart. Let it rise until double its size. Bake in a pre-heated oven at
350°F for 15-20 minutes.
32
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
CINNAMON ROLL
Ingredients
1 TB yeast
1 tsp sugar
½ cup water
2 cups milk
3 TB butter
¼ cup sugar
1 tsp salt
½ tsp vanilla
3 cups all-purpose flour
PY









Filling
¼ cup softened butter
⅓ cup brown sugar
2 tsp cinnamon
¼ cup chopped cashew nuts
½ cup raisins
C
O





¼ cup maple syrup, optional
¼ cup brown sugar
¼ cup white sugar
¼ cup butter
EP
E




D
Greasing mixture on pan
Procedure:
1. Mix together yeast, sugar, water and milk. Cover for 5 minutes.
D
2. Add in butter, sugar, salt, vanilla and flour. Let it rise for 25 minutes.
3. Roll on floured table.
4. Spread filling, roll and cut to 1” thick.
5. Place on greased pans and let it rise for 30 minutes.
6. Preheat 350°F, bake for 20 minutes.
33
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
SPANISH BREAD/PAN DE COCO/CHEESE BREAD
Ingredients









1 k bread flour
2 tbsp. instant yeast
¼ cup lukewarm water
2 cups water
100 grams brown sugar
2 tbsp.oil
2 tsp rock salt
1 tsp vanilla
75 grams lard
PY
SPANISH BREAD FILLING
Ingredients
½ bar butter
∕3 cup brown sugar
½ c bread crumbs
½ t vanilla
1
Mix and cook together.
C
O




PAN DE COCO FILLING
1 pc young coconut (grated)
1 cup brown sugar
1 tsp vanilla
EP
E



D
Ingredients
Mix and cook together.
D
CHEESE BREAD TOPPINGS
Ingredients


¼ cup butter
1 cup powdered milk
Cut in butter and milk then add sugar.
Procedure
1. Prepare the desired filling and/or topping. Set aside.
34
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
2. Dissolve yeast in ¼ cup lukewarm water. Sprinkle with 1 tbsp. sugar. Allow
to stand for 8-10 minutes.
3. Combine water, oil, salt and sugar. Stir until salt and sugar is dissolved. Set
aside.
4. In a separate bowl, place bread flour and make a well at the center. Then add
yeast mixture, follow by the liquid mixture. Mix thoroughly.
PY
5. Transfer dough on a floured board and start kneading. Continue kneading
until dough is smooth. (Approximately 20-25 minutes)
C
O
6. Shape into smooth ball and grease all sides with lard. Place in slightly
grease bowl. Cover with damp clean cloth. Allow to rise until double in size
approximately 1 ½ hours. Then punch down dough.
7. Shape and add fillings and/or topping
8. Arrange in grease cookie sheet.
9. Allow to rise for the second time until double in size.
EP
E
D
10. Bake until done (10-15 min at 350°F).
CHOCOLATE CHIP COOKIES
Ingredients
11∕8 cup flour
¼ tsp baking soda
½ tsp salt
¼ cup shortening
¼ cup sugar
1 egg, beaten
1 tsp vanilla
½ pound semi-sweet chocolate or chocolate chips
D








Procedure
1. Sift flour, baking soda and salt together.
2. Cream shortening, brown sugar and granulated sugar together.
35
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
3. Add egg and vanilla. Beat thoroughly.
4. Add sifted dry ingredients.
5. Fold in chocolate / chocolate chips cut into small pieces.
6. Drop from teaspoon onto greased cookie sheet.
PY
7. Bake in moderate oven (350°F) about 10 minutes. Make 50 cookies.
Ingredients
D
2 eggs, well beaten
1 ½ cups brown sugar
3 ¼ cups sifted flour
2 tsp baking soda
½ tsp salt
2 cups butter milk
1 cup chopped nuts
EP
E







C
O
BUTTERMILK NUT BREAD
Procedure
1. Beat eggs, add sugar and mix well.
D
2. Sift flour, baking soda and salt together. Alternately add buttermilk and egg
mixture to dry mixture.
3. Add nuts. Pour into 2 greased loaf pans.
4. Bake in slow oven (325°F) 1 hour. Makes 2 (8 x 4 inch) loaves.
36
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
CHEESE BISCUITS
Ingredients:





2 cup all-purpose flour
1 Tbsp baking powder
5 Tbsp butter or margarine
¼ cup grated cheddar cheese
1 egg, beaten
1. Sift flour and baking powder together.
PY
Procedure
C
O
2. Cut in butter until mixture resembles cornmeal.
3. Add cheese and milk to form soft dough.
4. Turn dough out on a lightly floured board and knead for 30 seconds.
5. Roll the dough out ¼ inch thick, and with a biscuit cutter cut out rounds.
D
6. Put half of the rounds on a baking sheet and top each with grated cheese.
EP
E
7. Brush the biscuits with the lightly beaten egg.
8. Bake in a hot oven (375°F) for 15 minutes or until they are golden.
BANANA MUFFIN
D
Ingredients








1 ½ c all-purpose flour
1 tsp baking powder
1 tsp baking soda
½ tsp salt
3 large bananas, mashed
¾ cup white sugar
1 egg
1
∕3 cup butter, melted
37
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Procedure
1. Pre heat oven to 350°F. Coat muffin pans with non-stick or use paper liner.
Sift together the flour, baking powder, baking soda, and salt. Set aside.
2. Combine bananas, sugar, egg, and melted butter in a large mixing bowl. Fold
in flour mixture, and mix until smooth. Scoop into muffin pans.
3. Bake in preheated oven. Bake mini muffins for 10 to 15 minutes, and large
muffins for 25 to 30 minutes. Muffin will spring back when lightly topped.
Rate your product using this Score Sheet.
Excellent
5
External Characteristics
1. Shape: well-proportioned;
Symmetrical; rounded top
2. Size: large but not airy;
proportional to weight
3. Color: even, rich golden brown
Very
Good
4
Good
3
Fair
2
Poor
1
C
O
Characteristics
PY
STANDARD SCORE SHEET for BREAD/ MUFFIN
EP
E
D
4. Crust: tender; crisp; even
thickness; free from cracks
Internal Characteristics
1. Color: creamy white; free from
streaks
2. Grain: fine; thin-walled cells,
evenly distributed
3. Texture: tender; soft; slightly
moist
4. Flavor: “wheaty” sweet
D
Comments:
38
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
HONEY RAISIN BARS
PY
Ingredients
 ¼ cup shortening
 ½ cup sugar
 ½ cup honey
 1 egg
 1 ½ cup cereal flakes
 1 ½ cup cake flour
 1 ½ tsp baking powder
 ¼ tsp baking soda
 ¼ tsp salt
 ½ cup milk
 1 cup seedless raisins
2. Add egg and beat well.
C
O
Procedure
1. Blend shortening, sugar, and honey thoroughly.
4. Stir in raisins.
D
3. Crush cereal flakes into fine crumbs, mix with sifted dry ingredients and add to
shortening mixture alternately with milk.
EP
E
5. Spread batter ½ inch thick in well-greased 10 x 15 inch pan.
6. Bake 15 to 20 minutes at 350°F.
7. Cool and cut into 35 2-inch squares.
CARAMEL SUGAR COOKIES
D
Ingredients
 1 cup shortening
 1 c sugar
 ½ c brown sugar
 3 eggs, beaten
 2 t vanilla
 3 ¾ c cake flour
 ½ c brown sugar
 1 t salts
 ½ baking soda
 brown sugar
39
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Procedure
1. Cream shortening.
2. Add sugar and brown sugar a little at a time and cream well.
3. Add beaten eggs and vanilla. Mix.
4. Sift flour, salt and baking soda together and combine with mixture. Chill.
5. Roll out ¼ inch thick.
PY
6. Sprinkle with brown sugar.
C
O
7. Bake in a moderate oven (350°F) for 15 minutes. Makes about 9 cookies.
EP
E
Ingredients
 1 cup shortening
 1 cup sugar
 1 egg, beaten
 2 Tbsp milk
 2 tsp vanilla
 3 ½ cup cake flour
 3 tsp baking powder
 ½ tsp salt
 3 ounces chocolate
D
CHOCOLATE REFRIGERATOR COOKIES
Procedure
1. Cream shortening and sugar together.
D
2. Beat egg and combine with milk and vanilla.
3. Sift dry ingredients together.
4. Add melted chocolate to creamed mixture. Alternately add the dry and liquid
ingredients.
5. Work until a smooth dough is formed.
6. Mold into a roll 2 inches in diameter and roll in waxed paper.
7. Chill until firm.
8. Slice ⅛ inch thick and bake at 350°F for 12 minutes. Make 150 cookies.
40
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
PINEAPPLE-NUT COOKIES
PY
Ingredients
 ½ cup shortening
 ½ cup brown sugar
 ½ cup sugar
 1 egg, beaten
 2 cup cake flour
 1 tsp baking powder
 ¼ tsp baking soda
 ¼ tsp salt
 ½ cup crushed pineapple
 2/3 cup chopped nuts
 1 tbsp lemon juice
C
O
Procedure
1. Cream shortening and both sugars together. Add egg and beat well.
2. Sift dry ingredients together and add with well-drained pineapple, nuts and
lemon juice.
3. Drop from a teaspoon or shape with a cookie press onto a well-greased
cookie sheet.
EP
E
D
4. Bake 15 to 20 minutes at 375°F. Makes 48, 2 ½ inch cookies.
Standard Score Sheet for Cookies
Excel
-lent
Characteristics
External Characteristics
REFRIDROP
BAR
GERATOR
D
Size and Shape:
Fairly
Uniform,
uniform,
will hold
mound
shape.
shape.
Color:
Lightly
Lightly
browned browned
5
ROLLED
MOLDED
Uniform,
thin
slices.
Retains
shape of
cutter
Uniform,
thin slices.
Lightly
browned
Lightly
browned
Lightly
browned
41
Very
Good
4
Good
3
Fair
2
Poor
1
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Characteristics
Excel
-lent
5
Very
Good
Good
4
3
Fair
2
Poor
1
Internal Characteristics
Texture:
Slightly
moist
Crisp,
tender
Crisp,
tender
Crisp, thin,
slightly moist
if thick,
tender
Pleasing,
no off
flavor, rich
Pleasing,
no off
flavor, rich
Pleasing,
no off
flavor, rich
Pleasing, no
off flavor,
rich
Slightly
moist,
tender
Pleasing,
no off
flavor, rich
PY
Flavor:
Activity 1.1.5
C
O
Comments:
5
4
3
Properly done with some illustrations and pictures of recipe
Properly done with few illustrations and pictures of recipe
D
2
CRITERIA
Artistically and creatively done with full illustrations and pictures of the
recipe
Artistically and creatively done with some illustrations and pictures of
the recipe
EP
E
SCORE
D
Something to do
Make an album of different bakery products with their corresponding picture and
recipe. Your output will be rated using the rubrics below:
1
Done untidy with few illustrations and pictures of recipe
Now you are ready to go on with the procedures on how to decorate
and present bakery products!
42
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
LO 2: Decorate and present bakery products


PY


Prepare a variety of fillings and coating/icing, glazes and decorations for
bakery products according to standard recipes, enterprise standards and/or
customer preferences.
Fill and decorate bakery products, where required and appropriate, in
accordance with standard recipes and/or enterprise standards and customer
preferences.
Finish bakery products according to desired product characteristics.
Present baked bakery products according to established standards and
procedures
C
O
What do you need to know?
D
Read Lesson Information closely and find out how much you can
remember. Then do Self-Check 2.2.1 to know how much you have
learned.
EP
E
Lesson Information
Decorate and Present Bakery Products
D
Bakers prepare, bake and decorate bread, rolls, biscuits, and other baked
products. Bakers work in a number of different environments from bakeries,
patisseries, and cake shops to hotels, restaurants, cafeterias, and factories, or as
part of bakery development for supermarkets or even in a cruise ship.
For you to become a baker, you need to complete an apprenticeship and
earn a National Certificate in Baking, Plant Baking or Craft Baking. Completing
Baking units while you are in school could be the first step towards baking
apprenticeship and an existing career as a baker.
Bakers usually work in shifts and may work early mornings, late evenings,
and weekends. So if you are an entrepreneur and a risk taker, this is good job for
you.
This lesson will provide you the knowledge, skills and understanding in
decorating and presenting bakery products. (www.s4gateway.org.nz/distancelearning/pathings/baking)
43
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Commonly Used Frostings or Icings, Fillings, and Glazes
BOILED ICING
Ingredients
 1 ½ cup sugar
 ¼ tsp cream of tartar or 1 tbsp. white corn syrup
 1∕8 tsp salt
 ⅓ cup water
 2 egg whites
 1½ tsp vanilla
Types of Icing, Filling and Glazes
Procedure
Best Used for
Coloring
Used as frosting and
filling. It is also used
for decorations
including roses, drop
flowers, sweet peas
and figure piping.
Filling and frosting.
Storage
Frosting and filling.
Needs
refrigeration
D
Types of Icing
C
O
PY
Procedure
1. Put egg whites, sugar, water and syrup on top of double boiler.
2. Beat until mixed well.
3. Place over rapidly boiling water.
4. Beat constantly with electric mixer or electric beater 7 minutes or until it will
stand or peaks when beater is raised.
5. Remove from heat. Add vanilla. Beat.
6. Fills and frosts a 2-layer cake, 8 or 9 inches.
D
EP
E
Butter and milk are beaten
American
together, and then
Butter Cream/
confectioner’s sugar is
Confectioner’s
added. Flavor the mixture
Sugar Icing
with extracts and
chocolate.
Butter Cream
It uses egg yolks and is
French
made the way as Italian
meringue.
Both use of egg white but
differences are how they
are made. Italian- Hot
sugar syrup is added to
Butter Cream
already whipped egg
Meringue
whites. Swiss- The whites
Italian and
and sugar are mixed
Swiss
together over heat and
whipped. And then, cooled
before the butter and
flavoring are added. This
type is the simplest.
44
Icing can be
refrigerated
or frozen in
an airtight
container for
week.
Needs
refrigeration.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Types of Icing
Butter Cream
Rolled
Procedure
Made from stiff American
butter cream. Dough-like
consistency that is rolled
out applied to cake.
Best Used for
Coloring
Covering cookies.
Can be tinted.
Storage
Same as
American
Butter cream
Glazes
Beaten with sugar. Can be
flavored. Stabilized for
longer life with gelatin.
EP
E
Whipped
cream
Creamy,
delicate
sweetness,
Perishable
Refrigerate
after
opening. Is
not
perishable if
used as a
filling
Used in general
Does not
piping or delicate
need
work. Decorating
refrigeration
cookies and bread
Air dried
houses. Tints to
decorations
pastel to dark colors. last for
months.
Can be used as a
Must remain
filling and frosting.
refrigerated.
Can be piped to
form soft
decorations. Tints in
pastel colors
PY
Used as a filling
alone or in
combination with
other fillings such as
butter cream.
C
O
Royal Icing
Heavy paste of egg whites
and confectioner’s sugar
beaten with a little vinegar
or lemon juice. Can be
made in different
consistencies.
D
Jams and
Jellies
Can purchase readymade: stir it to soften, or
heat with amount of liquid
if it’s too thick, and strain
to remove the seeds.
D
Self-Check 1.2.1
Something To Do
Read the statement carefully and write the correct word that describes each
statement. Write your answer in your test notebook.
__________1. The most important ingredient in all types of frosting
__________2. Made by warming egg whites, sugar, and water, and beaten until
fluffy and glossy
__________3. A French term which means rich and very chocolate
__________4. Made from beating egg whites and sugar
__________5. Sticky icing that dries a hard finish and is purely white
45
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
What do you need to know?
Read Lesson Information closely and find how you can remember.
Then do Self-Check 2.2.2 to know how much you have learned.
PY
Lesson Information
EP
E
D
C
O
Decoration is the final part of the production of any product.
Some need no further additions; some are added before the baking begins.
(www.wascatourism.com/...ITG_Prepare_&produce_cakes_&_pastries)
Ways to Present and Display Bakery Products:
Trays - After taking from the oven, product is placed onto cooling wires,
decorated and then placed on trays or platters.
D


Cellophane Bags - Bags are clear and transparent. Product is placed inside
the bags to protect from outside contamination and to slow the staling
process. Staling is caused by air passing through product and removing
moisture. Then moisture evaporates from surface.

Boxes - Product might be placed into boxes and displayed for sale, lots of 6
or 12. Some boxes might have see through lids.

Doilies - Some larger product might be placed on a doily and displayed
individually. The role of the doily is to have a barrier under product and
protect from surface contamination.
46
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Labels - Packaged products will have labels showing ingredients, name of
manufacturer and other legal requirements. They make good advertising.

Glass Vase - Used to graciously decorate a tray of cookies.
PY

Jar - This is one of the easiest ways to add a twist on cookie presentation.
D

C
O
For the vase filling, cut three lemons into small and thick slices. Set whole
lemons in the glass vase. Now, assemble lemon slices between the glass vase
and the whole lemons. Repeat this step until the glass vase is completed. Fill the
glass vase with water. Now, lay a plate on the top of the glass with waxed paper
and fill with eye-catching spring cookies.
EP
E
Fill a jar with colorful spring cookies. Make sure that the jar is big enough to fit
about 15 or 20 cookies. Once the jar is filled, you can decorate a spring-themed
covering for the lid of the jar. To do the covering, make a circle on a paper using
a round plate. Then, glue the circle onto a piece of colorful fabric. Green, yellow
and red are great colors for spring. Cut out the circle with sewing scissors. Lastly,
wrap the piece of fabric on the jar rim with twine.
D
How to Present Cookies for a Garden Party, April 16, 2013 retrieved from
blog.cookiesbydesign.com/how-to-present-cookies-for-a-garden-party/
47
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Self-Check 1.2.2
THICK and PAIR
PY
In 3-5 sentences, answer the following questions. Discuss your answer with
your seatmate.
1. How do we present and decorate bakery products?
C
O
2. Why is it important to decorate finished baked products?
Your answer will be rated using the rubrics below.
3
2
Exceptionally clear
and easy to
understand
Generally clear
and quite easy
to understand
Lacks clarity and
difficult to
understand
Unclear;
cannot
understand
Comprehensiveness
Thorough and
comprehensive
explanation
Substantial
Explanation
Partial or not
comprehensive
Explanation
Relevance
Highly relevant
Generally
relevant
Somewhat
relevant
Misundersta
nding
or serious
misconception on the
explanation
Irrelevant
1
D
EP
E
Clarity
4
D
CRITERIA
Activity 1.2.1
Decorate and present bakery products attractively using suitable garnishes
and service wares.
You will be evaluated using the following criteria:
48
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Dimension
Manifest less
understanding of
the step- by –step
procedure
seeking
clarification most
of the time
Works
independently
but with
assistance from
most of the
times
No
attempt
Observes
safety
precautions
most of the
time
Tasks is
completed
following the
procedures in
the project
Observes safety
precautions
sometimes
Most of the time
not observing
safety
precautions
No
attempt
Tasks is nearly
completed
following the
procedures in the
project
Work completed a
head of time
No
attempt
Work
completed
within allotted
time
Work completed
_ ( min./
hours/days)
beyond
Total Points
Work completed
_ ( min./
hours/days)
beyond
No
attempt
Works
independently
with ease and
confidence
most of the
times
No
attempt
D
4.
Completen
ess of task
Points
Earned
No
attempt
Manifests very
clear
understanding of
the step-by-step
procedure but
sometimes seeks
clarification
Works
independently
with ease and
confidence
sometimes
EP
E
3. Safety
work habits
Manifests clear
understanding
of the step- by
–step
procedures
No
attempt
PY
2. Application of
procedures
Uses tools
and
equipment
correctly
and
confidentl
y at all
time
Manifests
very clear
understan
ding of
the stepby-step
procedure
Works
independe
ntly with
ease and
confidenc
e at all
times
Observes
safety
precaution
s at all
time
Tasks is
completed
following
the
procedure
s in the
activity
with
improve
ment/
innovation
s
Work
completed
a head of
time
Performance level
Satisfactory
Needs
( 2 pts)
Improvement
(1 pts)
Uses tools and
Uses tools and
equipment
equipment
correctly and but incorrectly and
less confidently
less confidently
sometimes
most of the time
C
O
1. Use of
tools and
equipment
Very
Satisfactory
(3 pts )
Uses tools and
equipment
correctly and
confidently
most of the
time
D
Excellent
(4 pts)
5.Time
manageme
nt
49
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
LO 3: Store bakery products


Store bakery products according to established standards and procedure.
Select packaging appropriate for the preservation of product freshness and
eating characteristics.
PY
What do you need to know?
Lesson Information
D
How to Store Baked Products
C
O
Read Lesson Information and then find out how much you can
remember and then do the Self-Check 2.3.1 to know how much you
learned.
EP
E
Storing bakery products is one of the most important activities after
preparation. Bakery products are to be kept properly to avoid spoilage.
HOW TO STORE
WHERE TO STORE
HOW TO REFRESH
Ideally at room
temperature 75°F
to 85°F in
adequate space to
prevent crushing.
Relatively dry, a place well
above floor level, in a unit
cleaned daily and scrubbed
weekly; away from strong
odors particularly fish, onions,
cabbage, garlic, meats and
especially paints and cigarettes
smoke.
In original
wrappers
(moisture and
vapor proof) to
prevent drying out.
Refrigerate to prevent mold
growth, accelerates staling.
Store in freezer to retard
stalling in moisture- vaporproof wrapping.
Stale bread and
rolls, for all practical
purposes, cannot be
refreshed for
optimum quality.
Two or three days –
old bread, however,
can be used
toasted.
Frozen goods:
Thaw as rapidly as
possible or in oven
at 325°F for 20
minutes. Leave
wrapper on for room
temperature
thawing.
D
BAKED
PRODUCTS
Bread and
rolls general
storage
Soft –
crushed
breads, rolls,
sweet rolls
50
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
HOW TO STORE
Unwrapped
Covered or boxed
to prevent drying
out.
Crisp
cookies
Covered boxed.
Soft, chewy
cookies
Covered tightly.
HOW TO REFRESH
In areas with circulating
relatively dry air. Hard –
crusted goods in general have
a short shelf life since moisture
from the crust making it soft
and tough or “soggy”. Can be
stored in freezer, wrapped
loosely in paper, but keep best
when frozen partly baked in
vapor-proof wrapping.
Relatively dry, a place well
above floor level, in a unit
cleaned daily and scrubbed
weekly; away from strong
odors particularly fish, onions,
cabbage, garlic, meats and
especially paints and cigarettes
smoke.
Loosely covered container.
May be frozen.
C
O
Cupcakes
and muffins
WHERE TO STORE
Frozen goods:
Thaw wrapped as
rapidly as possible,
re crisp by heating
uncovered in a
400°F oven for
about 5 minutes.
Should be served
immediately.
Thaw frozen
cupcakes and
muffin, wrapped at
room temperature.
Use within two days
for best quality.
PY
BAKED
PRODUCTS
Hard –
crushed
breads and
rolls.
EP
E
D
Airtight metal container in cool
place
Thaw at room
temperature. Heat in
open shallow pan in
300°F oven for 3 to
5 minutes to refresh.
Thaw at room
temperature. Heat in
open shallow pan in
300°F oven for 3 to
5 minutes to refresh.
Freezer Storage Chart
BREAD
D
YEAST
BREAD,
Baked
Unbaked
HOW to PREPARE
for FREEZING
STORAGE
Prepare and bake as
usual. Cool to room
temperature. Wrap in
moisture-vapor-proof
material, seal.
HOW to THAW or
REHEAT for SERVING
up to 6 months
Prepare as usual,
shape, put into pan.
Wrap in moisture-vaporproof material, seal.
1-2 weeks
Thaw in wrappings at
room temperature or
remove from
wrappings, reheat in
300°F oven 25 to 30
minutes.
Thaw in wrappings in
refrigerator overnight.
Let rise in warm, moist
place until doubled.
Bake as usual.
51
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Unbaked
MUFFINS,
Baked
Prepare and bake as
usual. Cool to room
temperature. Wrap in
moisture-vapor-proof
material, seal.
Mix, roll and cut as
usual. Freeze without
wrapping (about 2 to 4
hours). Wrap in moisture
–vapor-proof materials,
placing piece of
wrapping material
between each biscuits.
Prepare and bake as
usual. Cool to room
temperature, Wrap in
moisture-vapor-proof
material, seal.
Mix as usual. Fill paper
baking cups 2/3 full.
Freeze 2 to 4 hours.
Wrap in moisture –
vapor- proof materials,
seal.
HOW to THAW or
REHEAT for SERVING
2-3 months
Thaw in wrappings in
250°F oven about 20
minutes or thaw,
wrapped at room
temperature 1 hour, in
300°F oven, about 10
minutes.
3-4 weeks
Thaw unwrapped about
1 hour. Bake as usual
or bake unwrapped in
425 °F oven 20 to 25
minutes.
3-4 months
Thaw in wrappings at
room temperature or
remove from
wrappings, reheat in
300°F oven 25 to 30
minutes.
3-4 weeks
Thaw unwrapped at
room temperature for
about 1 hour. Bake as
usual.
EP
E
D
Unbaked
STORAGE
PY
BISCUITS,
Bake
HOW to PREPARE
for FREEZING
C
O
BREAD
Storing techniques
D
1. Wrapping - to draw, fold and cover a bakery product.
2. Packaging Material - used to package bakery products like box, plastic,
container.
3. Cold Storage - the process of preventing perishable food on a large scale at a
low temperature or above the freezing point ( 0°C or 32°F ).
4. Chilling - method in which raw or processed food is cooled to a temperature
between (0°C - 5°C).
5. Freezing - subjecting food to temperature below freezing point (0°C or
32°F).
6. Refrigerator - an appliance to make or keep something, especially food or
drink, cold so that it stays fresh usually in a fridge.
52
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Self-Check 1.3.1
Something to do
Identify the storing techniques being described in the following statements.
Write your answers on your notebook.
Lesson Information
Select packaging materials
Packaging bakery products
D


C
O
PY
1. Process of preventing perishable food on a large scale by means of
refrigerator.
2. To draw, fold in order to cover.
3. Application of low temperature that changes the state of water in the food
from liquid to solid ice.
4. Method in storing in which raw food is cooled in 0°C-5°C.
5. It is used to pack bakery products.
EP
E
This lesson describes the skills and knowledge required to package and label
prepared bakery products for storage and transportation. It requires the ability to
check the quality of food and select correct packaging materials.
Food packaging – enclosing the food in a material for physical, chemical, biological
protection and tampering resistance; It provides nutrition information on the food
being consumed.
D
The aims of packaging are to keep the food in good condition until it is sold and
consumed, and to encourage customers to purchase the product. Correct packaging
is essential to achieve these objectives.

Packaging should provide the correct environmental conditions for food
starting from time food is packed until the time of consumption. A good
package should therefore perform the following functions:
a. Provide a barrier against dirt and other contaminants thus keeping the
product clean.
b. Prevent losses. For example, packages should be securely closed to
prevent leakage.
53
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Protect food against physical and chemical damage, such as, the
harmful effects of air, light, insects, and rodents. Each product has its
own needs.
Help the consumers to identify the food and instruct them how to use
it correctly.
Persuade the consumers to purchase the food.
Cluster or group together small items in one package for efficiency.
Marketing. The packaging and labels can be used by marketers to
encourage potential buyers to purchase the product.
Correct packaging prevents any wastage which may occur during
transportation and distribution.
C
O
Types of Packaging Materials
(www.fao.org/wairdocs/x5434e15434e0g.htm)
PY
c.
In many developing countries the most commonly used food packaging
materials include:
Wood
Paper
EP
E
D
Wooden shipping containers have traditionally been used for a wide range of
solid and liquid foods including fruits, vegetables, tea and beer. Wood offers good
protection, good stacking characteristics and strength. Plastic containers, however,
have a lower cost and have largely replaced wood in many applications. The use of
wood continues for some wines and spirits because the transfer of flavor compounds
from the wooden barriers improves the quality of the product.
Paper is an inexpensive packaging material. It is however highly absorptive,
and is fairly easily torn.
D
Glass
Glass has many properties which make it a popular choice as a packaging
material:





Glass is able to withstand heat treatments such as pasteurization and
sterilization.
It does not react with food.
It protects the food from crushing and brushing.
It is resist to moisture, gases, odors and microorganisms.
It is re-usable, re-sealable and recyclable.
54
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com

It is transparent, allowing products to be displayed. Colored glass may be
used either to protect the food from light or to attract customers.
Preparation of Glass Containers
inspection
washing
rinsing
sterilization
sealing and capping
cooling
PY






Plastics
C
O
The use of various plastics for containing and wrapping food depends on
what is available. Plastics are extremely useful as they can be made in either soft or
hard forms, as sheets or containers, and with different thickness, light resistance,
and flexibility. The filling and sealing of plastic containers are similar to glass
containers.
Flexible films are the most common form of plastic. Generally, flexible films
have the following properties:
D
Its cost is relatively low.
It has good barrier properties against moisture and gases.
It has heat wet and dry strength.
It is easy to handle and convenient for the manufacturer, retailer, and
consumer.
It adds little weight to the product.
It fits closely to the shape of the product, thereby wasting little space during
storage and distribution.
EP
E






D
Methods of Food Packaging
Home Canned Foods - One of the oldest and most common methods of
food packaging in homes is the use of home canning.
Canned foods - Canning foods as a method of food processing have been
around; foods that are canned commercially are cooked prior to being placed in the
can in order to prevent E. coli contamination. Canned foods come in a wide variety,
ranging from meat to vegetables to fruit.
Foil packaging - One of the innovative methods of commercial food
packaging is foil wrapping. Foil wraps are often pouches that are filled and then the
bottom and top of the pouch is sealed similar to those used with commercial frozen
55
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
packaging. Foil packaging allows the food to be sealed in the package without losing
any residual moisture that may still be in the food. The recommended types of food
to package in this manner are usually dried fruits, baked goods or grain products.
What Must Appear on the Label?
The following must appear on the label:

PY
Name under which the product is sold
List of ingredients
Quantity of certain ingredients
Net quantity
Date of minimum durability
Any special storage instructions or conditions of use
Name or business name and address of the manufacturer or packager
Place of origin of the foodstuff if its absence might mislead the consumer to a
material degree
Instruction for use where necessary
D
EP
E
D
Sample of Bakery Packaging
C
O








56
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Activity 1.3.1
Something to Do
SEAL IT ON
Dimension
Uses tools and
equipment
correctly and
confidently at
all time
No
attempt
Points
Earned
No
attempt
EP
E
D
1. Use of
tools and
equipment
Very
Satisfactory
(3 pts )
Uses tools
and equip
ment correctly
and
confidently
most of the
time
Performance level
Satisfactory
Needs
( 2 pts)
Improvement
(1 pts)
Uses tools
Uses tools
and
and
equipment
equipment
correctly and incorrectly
but less
and less
confidently
confidently
some
most of the
times
time
Manifests
Manifest less
very clear
underunderstanding of
standing of
the step- by –
the step- by – step
step
procedure
procedure but seeking
sometimes
clarification
seeks
most of the
clarification
time
Works
Works
independently independently
with ease and but with
confidence
assistance
sometimes
from most of
the
times
C
O
Excellent
(4 pts)
PY
Prepare bakery products for a company party. Prepare all materials and
ingredients, and perform actual preparation, presentation and storing of the bakery
products. Your output and performance will be rated using the rubric below.
Manifests very
clear understanding of
the step- by –
step
procedures
D
2.
Application
of
procedures
Works
independently
with ease and
confidence at
all times
Manifests
clear understanding of
the step- by –
step
procedures
Works
independently
with ease and
confidence
most of the
times
57
No
attempt
No
attempt
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
3.Safety
work habits
4.Completen
ess of task
Work
completed
within
allotted
time
Performance level
Satisfactory
Needs
( 2 pts)
Improvement
(1 pts)
Observes
Most of the
safety
time not
precautions observing
sometimes
safety
precautions
Tasks is
Work
nearly
completed a
completed
head of time
following
the
procedures
in the project
Work
completed
_ ( min./
hours/days)
beyond
Total Points
No
attempt
Points
Earned
No
attempt
No
attempt
Work
completed _
( min./
hours/days)
beyond
No
attempt
D
EP
E
D
5.Time
management
Observes
safety
precaution
-s at all
time
Tasks is
completed
following
in the
activity
improvement/
innovation
s
Work
completed
a head of
time
Very
Satisfactory
(3 pts )
Observes
safety
precautions
most of the
time
Tasks is
completed
following
the
procedures
in the
project
PY
Excellent
(4 pts)
C
O
Dimension
58
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
How much have you learned?
Post-assessment
Read and analyze each statement carefully. Choose the best answer and
write the letter only in your answer sheet.
C
O
PY
1. Which of the following ingredients is usually used in dough that gives better
taste and flavor?
A. butter
B. compound lard
C. edible tallow
D. vegetables oil
2. What kind of sugar is primarily used in preparing icing?
A. brown sugar
B. confectioner’s sugar
C. granulated sugar
D. refined sugar
EP
E
D
3. What is the basic ingredient in baking that improves aroma, flavor, and
nutrition in baked products?
A. baking powder
B. flour
C. shortening
D. sugar
D
4. Which of the ingredients is an example of a physical leavening agent?
A. air
B. baking powder
C. baking soda
D. yeast
5. Which kind of flour contains more gluten and less starch?
A. all-purpose flour
B. bread flour
C. cake flour
D. soft-flour
6. Which among the choices is a personal cleanliness practice in baking?
A. combing the hair in the working area
B. keeping fingernails long
C. washing the hands after work
D. wearing an apron during working hours
59
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
7. What is the first step to have better results in baking?
A. keeping oneself clean
B. keeping the food and equipment clean
C. keeping the utensils and work area clean
D. all of the above
9. How many cups is equivalent to one gallon?
A. 3
B. 5
C. 10
D. 16
PY
8. What is the best step to have better results in baking?
A. Measure ingredients accurately.
B. Memorize the recipe very well.
C. Use modern equipment.
D. Use only imported ingredients.
C
O
10. What is the proper way to measure flour accurately?
A. level off with the use of the tines of a fork
B. shakes the measuring cup before levelling
C. shovel the flour
D. sift it before measuring
EP
E
D
11. Which of the following is the best substitute for sour milk?
A. 1 C sweet milk plus 1 tbsp. vinegar
B. 1¾ C sweet milk plus 1 tbsp. vinegar
C. 2 C sweet milk plus ½ tbsp. vinegar
D. 2/3 C sweet milk plus 1 tbsp. vinegar
12. What is the best substitute for one cup sifted flour?
A. 1 C minus 1 tbsp. sifted all = purpose flour
B. 1 C minus 2 tbsp. sifted all = purpose flour
C. 1 C plus 2 tbsp. sifted all = purpose flour
D. 1 C sifted all-purpose flour
D
13. Which of the following flour mixture is thick enough to be rolled and kneaded?
A. batter
B. cream
C. crust
D. dough
14. It refers to the procedure of rubbing one or two ingredients against a bowl
with the tip of a wooden spoon or electric mixer.
A. beating
B. creaming
C. folding
D. stirring
60
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
15. Which of the following pastries refer to small, flat, and sweet cakes?
A. biscuits
B. cookies
C. muffins
D. pies
PY
16. Which among the following cookies needs freezing before it is cut into
desired shapes before baking?
A. cookie bar
B. pressed cookie
C. refrigerated cookie
D. rolled cookie
C
O
17. Which type of mixing technique is done only in baking bread?
A. blending
B. creaming
C. folding
D. kneading
D
18. It refers to the process of putting your product into containers for easy
distribution?
A. labeling
B. packaging
C. storing
D. wrapping
EP
E
19. It is one of the more innovative methods used in commercial food packaging.
A. canned package
B. chill packaging
C. foil packaging
D. freezing packaging
D
20. What storing technique is used to draw, fold and cover the bakery product?
A. chilling
B. folding
C. refrigerate
D. wrapping
61
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Generalization:
PY
This module gave opportunity to develop their
skills in Preparing and Producing Bakery Products
according to standard operating procedures,
techniques and knowledge of Bread and Pastry
Production.
D
EP
E
D
C
O
This prepares them to move on to the next
important skills for development in preparing and
procedure in pastry products.
62
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Quarter 2
PY
Overview
C
O
The term pastry comes from the word “paste”,
meaning “to stick”. Pastry is mixture of flour, liquid, and fat.
In the bakeshop, pastry refers to both various pastes and
dough and to the many products made from them.
D
EP
E
D
The two fundamental types of pastry are yeastraised pastry, such as Danish dough and pie dough.
Besides these various types of short dough, puff pastry,
also known as pâte feuilletée, and éclair paste, also known
as pâteà choux are other types of pastry. On the other
hand, crisp meringues and other meringue-type sponges
though they are not made from a flour paste are also
considered pastries because they are used like flour
pastries in combination with creams, fillings, fruits, and
icings to create a wide range of desserts.
63
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Definition of Terms
BAKING TERMINOLOGIES
As you wish to pursue baking as a career, you should familiarize yourself with
the common preparation and baking terminologies that come across in the process.
is to pinch together the edge of a piecrust with the fingers or
fork tines.
Crust
the outer part of a loaf bread or pastry.
Dissolve
to mix a dry substance with liquid until it is liquefied.
Mise en Place
a French term that means “put in place”. It includes
assembling all the necessary ingredients, equipment, and
tools needed to perform the task.
Pack compactly
to fill cup with brown sugar or shortening by pressing it with
back of the spoon.
Pastry creams
a thick sauce containing eggs and starch.
Pipe out
to press the mixture out of the piping bag.
Pre-heat
to heat the oven to a desired temperature before putting in the
food to bake or roast typically with a circular base.
D
EP
E
D
C
O
PY
Crimp
64
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
What do you already know?
Pre-assessment
Let us determine how much you already know about Bread and
Pastry Production. Take this test.
PY
Read and analyze each statement carefully. Choose the best answer and write
the letter only in your answer sheet.
develop gluten?
A. edible tallow
B. flour
C. salt
D. water
C
O
1. What important ingredient in pastries provides the needed moisture to
2. What kind of sugar is primarily used in preparing icing?
D
brown sugar
confectioner’s sugar
granulated sugar
refined sugar
EP
E
A.
B.
C.
D.
3. What basic ingredient in baking improves aroma, flavor and nutrition in baked
D
products?
A. baking powder
B. flour
C. shortening
D. sugar
4. What sweet baked good is usually made of dough?
A.
B.
C.
D.
bread
pastry
pie
pizza
5. What kind of flour contains more gluten and less starch?
A.
B.
C.
D.
all-purpose flour
bread flour
cake flour
soft-flour
65
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
6. Which refers to personal cleanliness practice in baking?
A. combing the hair in the working area
B. keeping fingernails long
C. washing the hands after work
D. wearing an apron during working hours
PY
7. Which type of light pastry is filled with whipped cream or a sweetened cream
filling and often topped with chocolate?
A. cream puff
B. Danish pastry
C. French pastries
D. pie and tart
C
O
8. What is the first step to have best results in baking?
A. measure ingredients accurately
B. memorize the recipe very well
C. use modern equipment
D. use only imported ingredients
9. How many cups are there in one gallon?
A. 3
B. 5
C. 10
D. 16
EP
E
D
10. What is the proper way to measure flour?
A. level off with the use of the tines of a fork
B. shakes the measuring cup before leveling
C. shovel the flour
D. sift it before measuring
D
11. What can be the substitute for 1 cup of whole milk?
A. ½ cup evaporated milk plus ½ cup water
B. 1 2∕3 C sweet milk plus 1 tbsp. water
C. 2 C sweet milk plus ½ tbsp. water
D. 2∕3 C sweet milk plus 1 tbsp. water
12. What is the best substitute for two cups of pastry flour?
A. 1 C sifted all-purpose flour
B. 1 C sifted all-purpose flour plus 2∕3 cup cake flour
C. 1 C minus 1 tbsp. sifted all-purpose flour
D. 1 C minus 2 tbsp. sifted all-purpose flour
13. What is the simplest method in mixing the ingredients together with a utensil,
usually a spoon, using circular motion?
A. beating
B. creaming
C. stirring
D. folding
66
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
14. What is the procedure of rubbing one or two ingredients against a bowl with
the tip of a wooden spoon or electric mixer?
A. beating
B. creaming
C. folding
D. stirring
PY
15. What is the outer part of a loaf bread or pastry?
A. crust
B. filling
C. muffins
D. topping
C
O
16. Which is a rich pastry filled with custard or fruit?
A. cream puff
B. Danish pastry
C. French pastries
D. pie and tart
D
17. What mixing technique in baking is usually used for meringue and for chiffon
products?
A. blending
B. folding
C. kneading
D. whisking
EP
E
18. How do you call the process of putting products into containers for easy
distribution?
A. labeling
B. packaging
C. storing
D. wrapping
D
19. It refers to one of more the innovative methods of commercial food
packaging.
A. canned package
B. chill packaging
C. foil packaging
D. freezing packaging
20. What storing technique is used to draw, fold and cover the bakery product?
A. chilling
B. folding
C. refrigerate
D. wrapping
67
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Lesson 2: PREPARE AND PRODUCE PASTRY PRODUCTS
EXPECTED OUTCOMES:
At the end of this module, you should be able to:
PY
LO1. Prepare pastry products
LO2. Decorate and present pastry products
LO3. Store pastry products
LO1. Prepare Pastry Products


EP
E

C
O

Select, measure, and weigh required ingredients according to recipe or
production requirements and established standards and procedures.
Prepare variety of pastry products according to standard mixing procedures,
formulation, recipes and desired product characteristics.
Use appropriate equipment according to required pastry products and
standard operating procedures.
Bake pastry products according to techniques and appropriate conditions,
and enterprise requirement and standards.
Select required oven temperature to bake goods in accordance with the
desired characteristics, standards recipe specifications and enterprise
practices.
D

D
What do you need to know?
Read Lesson Information and find out how much you can remember
and then do the Self Check 2.1.1 to know how much you’ve learned.
68
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Lesson Information
Measurement, Selection, Weighing and Substitution of Ingredients
In baking pastries, measuring makes a difference. It is important that the
ingredients are measured accurately to get the right consistency and taste.
PY
Adding the wrong amount of flour or sugar greatly affect the quality of pastry
products. Accurate measurement is one of the important factors that contribute to
success in baking.
Below are illustrations on how to measure baking ingredients
Flour
EP
E
D
C
O
Sift the flour to remove lumps and scoop it to fill the measuring cup until it
overflows. Do not shake the measuring cup but level the flour with a spatula or the
edge of a knife.
D
Granulated Sugar
Sifting is not necessary unless it is lumpy. Fill the measuring cup or scoop
the sugar until it overflows. Do not shake the measuring cup but level the sugar with
a spatula or the edge of a knife.
69
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Place the cup on a flat surface and pour the liquid until it reaches the
correct line on the measuring cup. Never lift the cup when pouring liquid.
Read the scale at eye level.
EP
E
a.
D
C
O
Liquid Ingredients
A liquid measuring cup is used to measure liquids.
PY
Brown sugar
Spoon and pack the sugar into a measuring cup until the sugar follows the
shape of the cup when inverted. When removed, the brown sugar will be molded into
the shape of the cup.
b.
D
Sticky wet ingredients like honey and molasses
Use heated spoon to measure the ingredient. The heat will keep it from
adhering, so it slides right off into your mixing bowl, ensuring that you get the full
measurement.
Solid fats
Fill the measuring cup with the shortening while pressing until it is full. Level
the fat with the spatula or the edge of a knife.
70
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
SUBSTITUTION of INGREDIENTS
Sometimes you may find it necessary to substitute one ingredient for another
in a recipe. However, using a different ingredient may change both the taste and
texture of your baking, so it is a good idea before substituting to understand the role
that ingredient plays in the recipe.
Use this table as a guideline powder.
INGREDIENT
AMOUNT
1 teaspoon
Baking
Soda (Sodium
Bicarbonate)
1/2 teaspoon
Chocolate,
Unsweetened
1 ounce
SUBSTITUTION
1/4 teaspoon baking soda plus 1/2
teaspoon cream of tartar plus 1/4
teaspoon cornstarch
2 teaspoons double-acting baking
powder (must replace the acidic liquid in
recipe with non-acidic liquid)
PY
Baking Powder, singleacting
D
EP
E
D
C
O
3 tablespoons natural cocoa powder plus
1 tablespoon unsalted butter, vegetable
oil or shortening
Fats, Margarine
1/2 cup)
1/2 cup salted or unsalted butter
Flour, All-purpose
1 cup
1 cup plus 2 tablespoons sifted cake
flour
Flour, Cake
1 cup
3/4 cup all-purpose flour plus 2
tablespoons cornstarch
Flour, Pastry
2 cups
1 1/3 cup all-purpose flour plus 2/3 cup
cake flour
Honey
1 cup
3/4 cup light or dark corn syrup plus 1/2
cup granulated white sugar
MILK, Buttermilk (sour 1 cup
1 tablespoon lemon juice or vinegar plus
milk)
enough milk to make 1 cup
MILK,
Evaporated 1 cup
1 cup light (30% butterfat) or heavy
Whole
whipping cream (35% butterfat)
Molasses
1 cup
3/4 cup light or dark brown sugar heated
to dissolve in 1/4 cup liquid
SUGAR,
granulated 1 cup
1 cup tightly packed light or dark brown
white
sugar
Vanilla Extract
1 teaspoon
1/2 teaspoon powdered
YEAST, active dry
1 envelope
1 tablespoon fast-rising active yeast
http://www.joyofbaking.com/IngredientSubstitution.html#ixzz3gF7G0H00
EQUIVALENT MEASURES
Standard Measure
1 tablespoon
1 fluid ounce
1 cup
1 pint
1 quart
1 gallon
2 gallons
Equivalent Measure
3 teaspoons; ½ fluid ounce
2 tablespoons
8 fluid oz, 16 tablespoon
2 cups
2 pints, 4 quarts
4 quarts; 16 cups
1 peck
71
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Ounce and Pound Measures:
Equivalent Measure
Standard Measure
4 ounces =
¼ pound
8 ounces =
½ pound
12 ounces =
¾ pound
16 ounces =
1 pound
www.joyofbaking.com/ingredientsubstitution.html
C
O
Ounces (oz) per cup
4 oz
4¼ oz
3½ oz
3 oz
4¾ oz
7 oz
D
Dry Ingredients
Ingredient
Flour, all-purposes, sifted =
Flour, bread, sifted =
Flour, cake, sifted =
Cocoa Powder, lightly spooned=
Dry milk powder =
Sugar, granulated =
PY
Weight Conversions for Common Baking Ingredients
Baking is an exact science, and measuring ingredients by weight is far more
accurate than measuring by volume. The following chart shows the conversion for
common baking ingredients, per one cup measure.
Ounces (oz) per cup
8 oz
8 oz
8 oz
8 oz
10½ oz
Butter and Fats:
Ingredient
Butter, 1 tablespoon =
Shortening =
Olive oil, canola oil, vegetable oil=
Ounces (oz) per cup
½ oz
6¾ oz
7½ oz
D
EP
E
Liquids and Dairy
Ingredient
Milk =
Buttermilk =
Heavy cream =
Sour cream =
Sweetened condensed milk =
Eggs, Raw, Large, Shelled
Measurement
Ingredient
1 large whole egg
1 large yolk
1 tablespoon
Ounces (oz)
1¾ oz
2/3 oz
72
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Self-Check 1.1
PY
Give the equivalent of the following measurements.
1. 1 tbsp.
= ________ tsp.
2. 12 tbsp.
= ________ cup
3. 1/8 cup
= ________ tbsp.
4. ½ cup
= ________ tbsp
5. 4 ounces
= ________ tbsp
C
O
What do you need to know?
EP
E
D
Read Lesson Information and then find out how much you can
remember. Do the Self Check 2.1.2 to know how much you have
learned.
Lesson Information
D
Pies and Pastries
Pies and pastries, like cakes, are delightful to eat especially when they are
baked properly. A well-prepared pastry may be determined by the quantity of its
pie crust.
Pastry is a delicate baked product which consists of crust and filling. It
contains high percentage fat, which contributes to a flaky or crumbly texture. A
good pastry is light and airy and fatty, but firm enough to support the weight of the
filling. When making a short crust pastry, care must be taken to blend the fat and
flour thoroughly before adding any liquid. This ensures that the flour granules are
adequately coated with fat and less likely to develop gluten.
Barney’s Bakery & Café Copyright 2013.
73
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Kinds of pastry
1. Cream puffs – a type of light pastry that is filled with whipped cream or a
sweetened cream filling and often topped with chocolate.
C
O
PY
2. Puff pastry- a light, flaky, rich pastry made by rolling dough with butter and
folding it to form layers: used for tarts, napoleon
EP
E
D
3. Danish pastry – a pastry made of sweetened yeast dough with toppings
such as fruit, nuts, or cheese.
D
4. French pastries - a rich pastry, filled with custard or fruit.
74
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
PY
5. Pie and tart - pastries that consist of two components: the first, relatively thin
pastry (pie) dough, when baked forms a crust (also called pastry shells) that
holds the second, the filling.
D
EP
E
Pastry ingredients
D
C
O
6. Croissants - a flaky raised dough. It is like a sweetened cross between a
simple yeast-raised dough and puff pastry. The dough is rolled with butter to
create layers and is then left to rise, creating a very light texture. The
downside is that it is technically involved and requires a great deal of work.
1. All-purpose flour - type of flour used in baking pastries .The gluten content
of this flour provides framework or substance of baked pastries.
2. Lard and vegetable shortening - fats frequently used to make pastry. Butter
and margarine produce a less tender crust.
3. Water – an important ingredient in pastry because it provides the moisture
needed to develop gluten.
4. Salt – contributes to the flavor of pastry and has no influence on flakiness or
tenderness.
75
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Mixing Techniques Applied for Pies and Pastries:
 Stirring - mixing all ingredients together usually with a spoon in a circular
motion.
Beating – introducing air into the mixture through mechanical agitation as in
beating eggs. An electric mixer is often used to beat the ingredients together.

Whisking – also known as the whipping method and is usually used for
meringue, and for chiffon products.Air is incorporated into such food as
whipping cream and egg whites through very vigorous mixing, usually with an
electric mixer or whisk.
D
EP
E
D
C
O
PY


Mixing Method – Basics Copyright 2000
Rolling - to flatten dough out into a sheet in preparation to shaping to various
forms.
76
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Laminating - fat is repeatedly folded into the dough.

Creaming – fat and sugar are beaten together until light airy texture.

Kneading - working with the dough using the heel of hands, accompanied by
pressing, stretching and folding in order to develop its gluten
D
EP
E
D
C
O
PY


Cut in or cutting in – cutting fat into smaller pieces using two knives or
pastry blender to distribute fat in flour until it resembles into coarse meal.
77
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Self-Check 2.1.2
Below are statements describing the different mixing techniques used in
producing pastry products. Choose the correct word/term from the box and
write your answer in your test notebook.
Creaming
Beating
Folding
Cutting - in
Whipping
Whisking
Rolling
Laminating
D
C
O
PY
_______________1. Ingredients are moved vigorously in a back and forth, up and
down, and around motion until they are smooth.
_______________2. Fat is repeatedly folded into the dough.
_______________3. Mixing of fat in dry ingredients by bench scraper or a pastry
blender with a food processor fitted with a steel blade, until
finely divided.
_______________4. Flattening the dough out into a sheet in preparation to
shaping to various forms.
_______________5. It is known as whipping method and usually used for
meringue and for chiffon products.
EP
E
Enhance your skills in different techniques in
pastry making. Perform the activity below.
D
Activity 2.1.1
Demonstrate how the different techniques in pastry making are done.
Refer to performance checklist below to rate your performance.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
beating
creaming
folding
rolling
kneading
cutting-in
78
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
How well did you perform? Find out by accomplishing
the Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely. Remember,
it is your learning at stake.
Using the Scoring Rubric below, check the appropriate box that corresponds
to your level of performance in doing each of the given tasks.
PY
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
4 – Advanced. Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
C
O
3 – Proficient. Can perform this skill satisfactorily without assistance or
supervision.
2 - Approaching to proficiency. Can perform this skill satisfactorily but requires
some assistance and/or supervision.
D
1 – Basic. Can perform parts of this skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision.
PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
1
2
3
4
EP
E
Beating - air is introduced into the mixture thru mechanical agitation
as in beating eggs.
Creaming - fat and sugar were beaten together until light airy
texture.
Rolling - dough was flatten out into a sheet in preparation to
shaping to various forms.
D
Kneading - dough was manipulated using the heel of hands,
accompanied by pressing, stretching and folding in order to
develop its gluten.
Cutting-in - fat were cut into smaller pieces using two knives or
pastry blender and distributed to flour until it resembles into coarse
meal.
79
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
What do you need to know?
PY
Read Lesson Information closely and find how much you much you
remember. Perform Self-Check 2.1.3 and find out how much you
have learned.
Lesson Information
C
O
Baking Tools and Their Uses
Measuring Tools
Baking is a precise skill, which calls for the exact measurement of the ingredients
to achieve desired outcome. How much of each ingredient to be used can be
determined using few standard measuring tools.
D
1. Measuring cups - these come in two types:
EP
E
a. Graduated or Liquid Measuring Cup - used for measuring liquids.
D
b. Individualized or Dry Measuring Cups - come in the series of cups
indicating fractional parts, commonly used for measuring flour.
2. Measuring Spoons - used for measuring small quantities of ingredients
like vanilla extract, baking powder, baking soda, salt and other minor
ingredients.
80
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
3. Weighing Scale - used to measure large
quantities of ingredients.
For baking purposes, a Dietetic or Spring Form Scale, where small
quantities of ingredients are weighed.
C
O
PY
4. Timer - monitors the baking time, and rising of yeast.
5. Oven Thermometer - Most oven temperatures vary from top to bottom
EP
E
D
and side to side; place an oven thermometer next to food while cooking
to ensure proper temperatures.
6. Candy Thermometer - used to measure temperature of boiled sugar
D
especially pulled sugar.
Mixing Tools and Utensils
Combining ingredients is an important part of many recipes. Having right
tools for mixing can make the job much easier. There are electric appliances
available for mixing ingredients, but the job can also be done by hand with the
following tools.
81
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
1. Mixing Bowls - comes in various sizes with sloping sides to ease mixing. It can
be made of pottery, glass, metal or plastic. Stainless steel mixing bowls are
best used in baking.
C
O
PY
2. Rubber Scraper – It is a pliable rubber or plastic used to scrape or remove
remaining ingredients from the sides of the mixing bowl. Also known as rubber
spatula.
EP
E
D
3. Rotary Egg Beater - It is used for beating eggs or whipping cream manually.
D
4. Whisk - Most whisks consist of a long, narrow handle with a series of wire
loops joined at the end. Commonly used to whip egg whites into a firm foam
to make meringue, or to whip cream into whipped cream.
5. Wooden Spoons – They are used as mixing spoons. Some cooks prefer to
use wooden spoons because they do not transfer bodily heat as much as
metal spoons. Unlike metal spoons, they can also be safely used without
scratching the bottom of the saucepan.
82
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
6. Flour Sifter - used for sifting and adding air to flour and other dry ingredients.
C
O
PY
7. Electric Mixer - intended for mixing, folding, beating, and whipping food
ingredients. Mixers come in two major variations, hand mixers and stand
mixers.
D
Cutting Tools
All cutting tools work best when they are properly maintained. A sharp tool
not only performs better but is safer to use, because less pressure is required to
cut through the ingredients.
EP
E
1. Chef's or French Knives - are all-purpose knives used for a variety of
chopping, slicing, and mincing tasks.
D
2. Bread Knife - It usually has a serrated edge. This helps cut bread or cake
without crushing it.
3. Kitchen Shears - They are used for cutting dried fruits and vegetables fresh
herbs, and cutting pastry.
83
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
4. Grater and Shredder - It is used to grate, shred or slice vegetables, fruits and
cheese.
C
O
PY
5. Cookie Cutters - They are used to stamp out individual cookies from rolled
dough. They are made of thin sheet metal or plastic that has been molded or
formed into shapes. The cutting edges must be even and sharp enough to
slice through the dough cleanly.
EP
E
D
6. Dough Cutter – It is used to cut dough during scaling. Never pull the dough for
it tears out the gluten strands. It is also called bench scraper.
Miscellaneous Tools
D
There are still more tools and utensils that are also essential in your kitchen. It
is very important that you have the following basic tools that you will need for baking.
These tools are vital for you to have since they make the process more efficient and
easier. Try to keep them in mind all the time so that you will have a guide.
1. Metal Spatula – This is also called palette knife. A large spatula is used for
frosting cakes, while small spatula is used to loosen cookies from the pan and
to level the flour.
84
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
2. Rolling Pin - It rolls out, flattens or thins the dough or paste. It may be made of
wood, metal, marble or synthetic materials.
C
O
PY
3. Pastry Blender - It cuts fat into pieces to be able to coat it with flour in pie
making
EP
E
D
4. Pastry Wheel - It has a very sharp, round; nickel-plated blade attached to a
handle, the wheel rotates as it is pushed over rolled dough, making long,
smooth continuous cuts.
D
5. Pastry Brush - It may be made of soft, flexible nylon or unbleached hog
bristles. It is used for greasing pans, washes, and brushing of cake crumbs.
6. Parchment Paper – It is grease-resistant, non-stick, heatproof, quick-release
coated paper. It is used as lining baking pans and making piping cones for
decor work. The paper can be reused until it becomes dark and brittle.
85
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
C
O
Decorating Tools
PY
7. Wire Cooling Racks - They have feet that raise them above the counter so
that moisture does not collect under cooling baked goods. These racks can
also be used for glazing and confectionery works.
D
Cake decorators use edible decorations, such as frosting, and inedible
decorations, such as flowers, plastic figurines and ribbon. Having the proper cake
decorating tools can create a big distinction. The process of cake decoration is
enjoyable and helps to express the artistic side in you. The list of decorating tools
will help you create fancy designs on your baked products.
D
EP
E
1. Pastry Tip/Piping Tubes - They are plastic or metal tubes attached at the tip of
the pastry bag to achieve the desired design when piping out icing. Piping
tubes can be bought at good stores, or shops selling catering equipment and
cake icing centers. They are available in both plastic and metal.
86
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Self-Check 2.1.3
Classify the following tools according to their use. Choose your answer from the
choices below. Write the letter that corresponds to your answer.
cutting tool
decorating tool
miscellaneous tool
mixing tool
PY
A.
B.
C.
D.
EP
E
D
C
O
1. rubber scraper
2. wooden spoon
3. bread knife
4. grater and shredder
5. spatula
6. pastry tip
7. whisk
8. pastry blender
9. pastry wheel
10. flour sifter
D
Enhance your skills in demonstrating the use of
tools by making a Basic Pie Crust. Perform the
activity below.
Activity 2.1.2
Basic Pie Crust
Crust
1½ cups All-purpose flour
½ cup shortening
6-8 Tbsp cold water
87
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Procedure
1. Cut in fat and flour using pastry blender until ingredients resemble a coarse
meal.
2. Gradually add cold water.
3. Start forming the dough into balls. Do not knead.
4. Flatten the dough with the rolling pin starting from the center to all directions to
maintain its round shape.
5. Transfer the dough/crust in the pie pan. Set aside.
PY
How well did you perform? Find out by accomplishing
the Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely. Remember,
it is your learning that is at stake.
C
O
Using the Scoring Rubric below, check the appropriate box that corresponds to your
level of performance in doing each of the given task.
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
4 – Advanced. Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
D
3 – Proficient. Can perform this skill satisfactorily without assistance or
supervision.
EP
E
2 - Approaching to proficiency. Can perform this skill satisfactorily but requires
some assistance and/or supervision.
1 – Basic. Can perform parts of this skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision.
PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
1
2
3
4
D
Demonstrated the use of mixing tools like mixing bowl, wooden
spoon, pastry blender etc.
Demonstrated proper use of measuring tools.
Used miscellaneous tools properly.
Used cutting tools correctly.
88
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
What do you need to know?
PY
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you can
remember. Perform Self-Check 2.1.4 to find out how much you have
learned.
C
O
Lesson Information
Preparing and Baking Pies and Pastries
EP
E
D
Pastries are one of the most popular dessert and snack foods. Many
seasonal fruits go well with a pie crust. Many of our wide range of desserts can fill in
a pastry shell. Buko, banana, mango, pineapple, and egg pies are among the
favorites. Would you like to bake your own pie? Test yourself if you can make a
good pie crust. Study carefully the ingredients and procedure in preparing and
baking pastries and pies.
D
The succeeding pages provide recipes for the different types of Pastry
Products. Divide the class into five groups. Select a recipe for the group to
bake. No two groups should do the same recipe. There are enough recipes
for all the groups to choose from.
89
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Enhance your skills in baking pastries. Perform the activity below
Activity 2.1.3
Egg Pie
PY
Crust
3 Eggs
250 grams Skimmed milk
¾ cup Sugar
2 ½ cup Water
1 Tbsp All-purpose flour
½ tsp Vanilla
Procedure
D
Filling






C
O
 1 ½ cups All-purpose flour
 ½ cup Butter or shortening
 6-8 Tbsp cold water
D
EP
E
Crust
1. Cut in fat and flour using pastry blender until ingredients resemble a coarse
meal.
2. Gradually add cold water. Start forming the dough into balls. A few drops of
water may be added if dough will not hold together. Do not knead.
90
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
3. Sprinkle flour lightly on board and rolling pin. Place the dough on the board
and shape into ball with your hands.
EP
E
D
C
O
PY
4. Roll the dough form the center to edges, releasing pressure near the edge to
keep thickness of the dough even. Roll in all directions to maintain perfect
circle. The dough should be an inch layer than the pie plate.
D
5. Roll dough over the rolling pin then unroll over the pie plate. This will prevent
the dough from breaking when transferring from the board to the pie plate. Fit
snugly on the pan. Prick liberally with tines of a fork. Set aside.
6. Prepare Filling :
Mix all ingredients thoroughly. Pour in the prepared pie pan. Bake at 350º F
for 30 – 45 minutes.
91
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
How well did you perform? Find out by accomplishing
the Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely. Remember,
it is your learning that is at stake.
Using the Scoring Rubric below, check the appropriate box that corresponds to your
level of performance in doing each of the given task.
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
PY
4 – Advanced. Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
3 – Proficient. Can perform this skill satisfactorily without assistance or
supervision.
C
O
2 - Approaching to proficiency. Can perform this skill satisfactorily but requires
some assistance and/or supervision.
1 – Basic. Can perform parts of this skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision.
1
2
3
4
D
PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
EP
E
Fat and flour were cut in using pastry blender until ingredients
resemble a coarse meal.
Cold water was gradually added.
Board and rolling pin were sprinkled with flour lightly. Dough
was place on the board and shape into ball with hands.
D
Dough was rolled out from the center to edges, releasing
pressure near the edge to keep thickness of the dough even.
Dough was rolled in all directions to maintain perfect circle.
Dough was rolled over the rolling pin then unroll over the pie
plate.
Ingredients for fillings were thoroughly mix.
Baked at 350°F for 30 – 45 minutes.
http://imgkid.com/crust.shtm. Methods featured in Professional Baking, Sixth Edition
by Wayne Gisslen. © 2013 John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
92
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Enhance your skills in baking pastries.
Perform the activity below
Activity 2.1.4
Cream Puff
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EP
E
D
6.
ml
tsp
pc
g
g
D
Filling
270
½
1
50
15
10
g
1
tsp
Ganache
100
grams
1
2-4
tsp
Tbsp
PROCEDURE
Bring to boil the first four ingredients
(milk, water, butter and sugar).
Add all-purpose flour.
Remove from heat if desired consistency
is attained.
When paste is already cooled, add the
egg one at a time and mix thoroughly.
Spoon the paste in the cookie sheet
lined with wax paper (Cream puff size
and shape).
Bake at 400ºF for 20 min or until paste is
puff then lower the temp, to 300ºF
continue baking for 20 min. Or until
brown. Set aside.
Assemble filling for cream puff
Top with powder sugar or with ganache.
PY
Description
milk
water
butter
sugar
eggs
all-purpose
flour
C
O
Cream Puff Paste
Quantity
Unit
60
ml
60
ml
1/4
cup
1
Tbsp
2-3
pcs
120
g
fresh milk
vanilla
egg
sugar
all-purpose
flour
cornstarch
brandy
chocolate
bar
Butter
All-purpose
cream
7.
8.
1. Mix and cook over low fire stirring
constantly until proper consistency is
attained. Allow to cool.
 Melt together over low fire.
93
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
How well did you perform? Find out by accomplishing
the Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely. Remember,
it is your learning at stake.
Using the Scoring Rubric below, check the appropriate box that corresponds to your
level of performance in doing each of the given task.
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
PY
4 – Advanced - Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
C
O
3 – Proficient - Can perform this skill satisfactorily without assistance or
supervision.
2 - Approaching to proficiency- Can perform this skill satisfactorily but requires
some assistance and/or supervision.
1 – Basic - Can perform parts of this skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision.
D
PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
1
2
3
4
EP
E
Boiled the first four ingredients (milk, water, butter and sugar).
Flour was added.
Removed from heat if correct consistency attained.
Egg was added one at a time when paste is already cool.
Eggs were mixed thoroughly.
D
Paste was spooned in a cookie sheet lined with wax paper.
Baked at 400ºF for 20 min or until paste is puff.
Assembled cream puff filling.
Topped with Ganache.
94
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Enhance your skills in baking pastries.
Perform the activity below.
Activity 2.1.5
2
¼
1
pcs
cup
drop
D
PY
PROCEDURE
1. Cut in flour, shortening and sugar until
it forms a corn meal.
2. Gradually add cold water and allpurpose cream.
3. Form into dough.
4. Flatten and arrange to individual tart
molder. Set aside.
C
O
cup
cup
All-purpose flour
butter
sugar
cold water
All-purpose
cream
evap
all-purpose
cream
egg yolks
sugar
vanilla
EP
E
Filling
½
¼
Description
1. Combine all ingredients for filling.
2. Cook over low fire or in a double boiler
until thick.
3. Pour in a prepared tart molder line with
crust.
4. Bake at preheated oven for 20-25
minutes.
5. Allow to cool and pack in colored
cellophane.
D
Custard Tart
Quantity Unit
Crust
1
Cup
¼
Cup
1
Tbsp
2-4
Tbsp
1
Tbsp
How well did you perform? Find out by
accomplishing the Scoring Rubric honestly and
sincerely. Remember, it is your learning that is at
stake.
Using the Scoring Rubric below, check the appropriate box that corresponds to your
level of performance in doing each of the given task.
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
4 – Advanced. Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
3 – Proficient. Can perform this skill satisfactorily without assistance or
supervision.
95
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
2 - Approaching to proficiency. Can perform this skill satisfactorily but requires
some assistance and/or supervision.
1 – Basic. Can perform parts of this skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision.
PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
1
2
3
4
Cut in flour, shortening and sugar until it forms a corn meal.
Formed into dough.
Flattened and placed dough to individual tart molder.
C
O
All ingredients for filling were combined.
PY
Cold water and all-purpose cream added gradually.
Filling was cooked over low fire or in a double boiler until thick.
Cooked filling was poured in a prepared tart molder line with
crust.
Baked at preheated oven for 20-25 minutes.
EP
E
D
Allowed to cool and packed in colored cellophane
Enhance your skills in baking pastries.
Perform the activity below.
Activity 2.1.6
D
BUKO PIE
Use Double Crust Pie. Roll out the half of the dough for lower crust and fit
snugly into the pie plate. Prick and set aside.
FILLING
2 cups slivered young coconut or buko
¾ cup sugar
½ cup flour
½ cup coconut water
½ cup evaporated milk
96
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
PROCEDURE
1. Blend ingredients for filling.
2. Cook over slow fire stirring continuously until thick.
3. Pour into prepared pie shell.
4. Top with another half of the pie dough.
5. Bake as directed for double crust pies.
PY
How well did you perform? Find out by
accomplishing the Scoring Rubric honestly and
sincerely. Remember, it is your learning that is at
stake.
C
O
Using the Scoring Rubric below, check the appropriate box that corresponds to your
level of performance in doing each of the given task.
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
4 – Advanced. Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
D
3 – Proficient. Can perform this skill satisfactorily without assistance or
supervision.
EP
E
2 - Approaching to proficiency. Can perform this skill satisfactorily but requires
some assistance and/or supervision.
1 – Basic. Can perform parts of this skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision.
PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
1
2
3
4
D
1. Blended ingredients for filling.
2. Cooked over slow fire stirring continuously until thick.
3. Poured into prepared pie shell.
4. Topped with another half of the pie dough.
5. Baked as directed for double crust pies.
97
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Enhance your skills in baking pastries.
Perform the activity below
Activity 2.1.7
MANGO PIE
C
O
EP
E
D
FILLING
 1 ¾ cups milk, evaporated
 1 cup sugar
 ¼ cup cornstarch
 2 tbsp. water
 ¼ cup butter
 3 pieces mangoes, fresh, sliced
 ¼ cup cold water
 2 tbsp. gelatin, unflavored
 3 tbsp. sugar
PY
INGREDIENTS
*Use Single Pie Crust. Prebake.
D
PROCEDURE
1. Blend and bring to a boil milk and sugar.
2. Suspend starch in water.
3. Stir into milk mix over medium heat, stirring continuously until thickened.
4. Add butter and blend until smooth. Remove from fire.
5. Pour into prebaked shell. Set aside.
6. Prepared mangoes. Arrange on top of the prepared cream.
7. Suspend gelatin in cold water. Add sugar. Heat until gelatin is dissolved and
pours over pie.
8. Chill until gelatin is set.
How well did you perform? Find out by accomplishing
the Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely. Remember,
it is your learning at stake.
98
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Using the Scoring Rubric below, check the appropriate box that corresponds to your
level of performance in doing each of the given tasks
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
4 – Advanced. Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
3 – Proficient. Can perform this skill satisfactorily without assistance or
supervision.
PY
2 - Approaching to Proficiency. Can perform this skill satisfactorily but requires
some assistance and/or supervision.
C
O
1 – Basic. Can perform parts of this skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision.
PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
1
2
3
4
D
1. Blended and brought milk and sugar to a boil.
EP
E
2. Suspended starch in water.
3. Stirred in milk and mixed over medium heat, stirring
continuously until thickened.
4. Added butter and blended until smooth. Removed from
fire.
5. Poured into prebaked shell. Set aside.
D
6. Prepared mangoes. Arranged on top of the prepared
cream.
7. Suspended gelatin in cold water. Added sugar. Heated
until gelatin was dissolved and poured over pie.
8. Chilled until gelatin was set.
99
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Enhance your skills in baking pastries.
Perform the activity below.
Activity 2.1.8
C
O
Ingredients
1 recipe pastry for a 9 inch double crust
 ¾ cup white sugar
 1 tbsp. cornstarch
 1 (20 Oz.) can crushed pineapple with juice
 1 tbsp. lemon juice
 2 tbsp. milk
 1 tbsp. white sugar
PY
Pineapple Pie
Procedure
EP
E
D
1. Preheat oven to 425°F (220°C).
2. In a medium saucepan, combine sugar, cornstarch, pineapple with juice and
lemon juice. Cook over medium heat, stirring constantly until thickened, then
allow to boil for 1 minute.
3. Cool slightly and pour mixture into pastry-lined pie pan. Cover with top crust
and seal. Make a few steam vents in crust, then brush with milk and sprinkle
with sugar. Place in preheated oven and bake for 35 minutes. Serve chilled or
at room temperature.
D
www.allreciped.com/recipe/15903/pineapple-pieiii/
How well did you perform? Find out by accomplishing
the Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely. Remember,
it is your learning at stake.
100
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Using the Scoring Rubric below, check the appropriate box that corresponds to your
level of performance in doing each of the given task.
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
4 – Advanced. Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
3 – Proficient. Can perform this skill satisfactorily without assistance or
supervision.
PY
2 - Approaching to Proficiency. Can perform this skill satisfactorily but requires
some assistance and/or supervision.
1 – Basic. Can perform parts of this skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision.
C
O
PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
1
2
3
4
1. Preheated oven to 425°F (220°C).
EP
E
D
2. In a medium saucepan combined sugar, cornstarch,
pineapple with juice and lemon juice. Cooked over medium
heat, stirring constantly until thickened, then allowed to boil
for 1 minute.
3. Cooled mixture slightly and poured into pastry-lined pie
pan. Covered with top crust and seal. Made a few steam
vents in crust, then brushed with milk and sprinkled with
sugar. Placed in preheated oven and baked for 35 minutes.
Served chilled or at room temperature.
D
Enhance your skills in baking pastries.
Perform the activity below.
Activity 2.1.9
BOAT TARTS
INGREDIENTS
2 cups all- purpose flour
1 tsp salt
2 tbsp. sugar
½ cup margarine or butter
1 tsp water
101
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
PROCEDURE
1. Sift flour, salt and sugar into a bowl.
2. Add the margarine and cut with a pastry blender until margarine is broken
into fine particles.
3. Sprinkle water, stir and gather mixture to form dough. Chill.
4. Roll out about 1/8 thick.
5. Cut with cutter and fit into boat tart shells.
6. Fill with cashew nut filling. Bake at 350°F for 10 minutes or until golden
brown. Makes 24 boat tarts.
PY
How well did you perform? Find out by accomplishing
the Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely. Remember
it is your learning that is at stake.
C
O
Using the Scoring Rubric below, check the appropriate box that corresponds to your
level of performance in doing each of the given task.
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
4 – Advanced. Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
D
3 – Proficient. Can perform this skill satisfactorily without assistance or
supervision.
EP
E
2 - Approaching to Proficiency. Can perform this skill satisfactorily but requires
some assistance and/or supervision.
1 – Basic. Can perform parts of this skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision.
PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
1
2
3
4
1. Sifted flour, salt and sugar into a bowl.
D
2. Added the margarine and cut with a pastry blender until
margarine is broken into fine particles.
3. Sprinkled water, stirred, and gathered mixture to form
dough. Chilled.
4. Rolled out dough about 1/8 thick.
5. Cut with cutter and fit into boat tart shells.
6. Filled with cashew nut filling. Baked at 350°F for 10
minutes or until golden brown. Makes 24 boat tarts.
102
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Scaling Instructions for Baked Pies
PIE SIZE
8 in.
9 in.
WEIGHT OF
FILLING
26-30 oz
32-40 oz
PIE SIZE
20 cm
23 cm
WEIGHT OF
FILLING
750-850 g
900-1150 g
PY
What do you need to know?
D
Lesson Information
C
O
Read Lesson Information very well then find out how much you can
remember. Then perform Self-Check 1.4 to find out how much you
have learned.
Baki ng Temperat ures f or Pi es and Past ri es
EP
E
Not all ovens are of the same kind and type. Check on the quality of oven to
be used to ensure its capacity to produce quality pastry products. Heat should be
evenly distributed throughout the compartment. Use the table below as your
temperature guide in baking pies and pastries
D
Types of Product
Pastry
One – crust pie (custard type,
unbaked shell)
Meringue on cooked filling in
prebaked shell
Shell only
Two – crust pies with
uncooked filling
Two – crust pies with cooked
filling
Oven Temperature
Baking Time
400°F to 425°F
30 to 40 min
350°F to 425°F
12 to 15 min
450°F
10 to 12 min
400°F to 425°F
45 to 55 min
425°F to 450°F
30 to 45 min
103
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Self-Check 1.4
Give the oven temperature for baking the different types of Pastry Products.
Oven Temperature
PY
Types of Pastry Product
2. Meringue on cooked filling in
prebaked shell
EP
E
D
3. One – crust pie (custard type,
unbaked shell)
C
O
1. Two – crust pies with uncooked
filling
Now you are ready to go on with the ways on how to decorate and
present pastry products!
D
LO2. Decorate and Present Pastry Products




Prepare a variety of fillings and coating/icing, glazes and decorations for pastry
products according to standard recipes, enterprise standards and/or customer
preferences.
Fill and decorate pastry products, where required and appropriate, in
accordance with standard recipes and/or enterprise standards and customer
preferences.
Finish pastry products according to desired product characteristics.
Present baked pastry products according to established standards and
procedures.
104
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
What do you need to know?
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you can
remember. Find out how much you have learned by doing Self-check
2.2.1.
PY
Lesson Information
Variety of Frosting or Icing, Fillings and Glazes Used in Pastries
C
O
The easiest way to decorate an ordinary pastry is with coat of glaze. The
simplest option barely requires a recipe at all. Just mix confectioner’s sugar with a
liquid such as milk or lemon, adjusting the proportions until you reach the desired
thickness. We can add a bit of citrus zest, liqueur, and vanilla extract or other
flavoring agent. Other glazes feature extra richness from butter, heavy cream,
chocolate, or caramel. All of the options should be used immediately after they are
made and then given a few minutes to set before serving.
D
Basic Milk Glaze
EP
E
Whisk together 2 cups confectioner’s sugar and ¼ cup milk until smooth,
adding more milk if needed to reach desired consistency. Make about ¾ cup.
Brown Sugar Glaze
D
Heat 6 tbsp. unsalted butter and ½ cup packed light brown sugar in a
saucepan over medium, stirring, until sugar has dissolved. Add 2 tbsp. of heavy
cream, 1 tsp vanilla extract and ½ tsp. salt brings to a boil. Remove from heat, then
let cool until thickened. This makes about 1 cup.
Lemon Glaze
Whisk together 2 cups confectioner’s sugar with 2 tsp. finely grated lemon
zest and ¼ cup lemon juice until smooth. This makes about 1 cup.
Chocolate Glaze
Place 3 ounces chopped bitter sweet chocolate in a heatproof bowl. Bring
½ cup heavy cream to a simmer in a small saucepan, pour over chocolate. Let stand
for 2 minutes. Add 2 tbsp. unsalted butter, and mix until smooth. Let stand, stirring
occasionally until slightly thickened. Make 1 cup.
105
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Boiled Icing
Ingredients





2 cups sugar
⅓ cup water
¼ tsp cream of tartar
1 tbsp. corn syrup
2 egg whites
Procedure:
PY
Combine together sugar, water and syrup.
Bring to boil over low fire until it forms into threadlike consistency.
On a separate bowl, beat together egg whites and cream of tartar until stiff.
Pour hot syrup to beaten egg whites gradually.
Continue beating until mixture becomes stiff and fluffy.
Fills and frost a layer cake using boiled icing.
C
O
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The table below indicates the different kinds of fillings for pies and pastry. It shows
how they are made, their uses and how to store them.
How made
Best Used for
coloring
Storage
Jams and
Jellies
Can purchase ready –
made: stir it to soften, or
heat with amount of liquid if
it’s too thick, and strain to
remove the seeds.
It is made from beating egg
whites with sugar.
Used as a filling
alone or in
combination with
other fillings such as
butter cream.
Used for covering
pies. Can be piped.
Refrigerate after
opening. Is not
perishable if
used as filling.
Made from sugar and water,
and then cooked. Can be
flavored which should
complement the flavors
pastry.
Beaten with sugar. Can be
flavored. Stabilized for
longer life with gelatin.
Syrup is popular in
presenting cream puff
and éclair, it tastes
fresh and moist.
EP
E
D
Description
Meringue
Pure white fluffy
beaten egg
whites.
D
Simple Sugar
Syrup
Whipped
Cream
Creamy,
delicate
sweetness,
Perishable
Source: Methods featured in Professional Baking,
John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
106
Can be used as a
filling and frosting.
Can be piped to form
soft decorations.
Does not need
refrigeration
Becomes sticky
when
refrigerated.
Keep excess
refrigerated.
Must remain
refrigerated.
Sixth Edition by Wayne Gisslen. © 2013
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Self-Check 2.2.1
Arrange the following steps in making Boiled Icing. Use A for the first step, B for
second and so on. Write your answer on your test notebook.
____ 1. Bring to boil over low fire until it forms into a threadlike consistency.
____ 2. Combine together sugar, water and syrup.
PY
____ 3. On a separate bowl, beat together egg whites and cream of tartar until stiff.
____ 4. Pour hot syrup to beaten egg whites gradually.
____ 5. Fills and frost a layer cake using boiled icing.
C
O
____ 6. Continue beating until mixture becomes stiff and fluffy.
EP
E
D
What do you need to know?
Read Lesson Information closely and find out how much you can
remember. Perform Self-Check 2.2 to find out how much you have
learned.
D
Lesson Information
Accompaniments, Garnishes and Decorations for Pastries
Syrup
107
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Flavored simple syrup is used to moisten some pastries. Flavorings maybe
extracts like vanilla, liquors like rum. Add flavorings after the syrup has cold,
because flavor maybe lost if they are added to hot syrup. Syrups may also be
flavored by boiling them with lemon or orange rind.
PY
Pastry Cream
EP
E
D
Custards
C
O
Contains starch thickeners as well as eggs, resulting in a much thicker and
more stable product. It is used as pastry fillings for cream pies and as pudding.
With additional liquid, it is used as custard sauce.
It consists of milk, sugar, eggs and flavorings. Whole eggs are used for
greater thickening power. Used as pie fillings and as a dessert by itself
D
Basic Custards and Creams. https://books.google.com.ph
Nut Garnish
108
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Rules for Garnishing Pastry Products
D
C
O
Sample of Pastry Products Presentations
PY
1. Garnishes should be edible.
2. Simplicity is beauty and therefore garnishes should appear natural, fresh and
dainty – never overworked or overdone.
3. A few small groups of garnish are often more attractive than a continuous
decorative scheme.
4. Colors should be harmonized – never clash. Contracting colors usually produce
an artistic picture. Artificial coloring should be kept to the minimum.
5. Garnishes which are highly seasoned are not good in taste.
6. Garnishes need not be expensive.
7. The setting must be viewed as a whole.
Butterflies and Bow Tie Pastries
D
EP
E
Peach Cream Pie
Cream Puff and Eclairs
Fresh Fruit Tart
Tartlet
109
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Self-Check 2.2.2
C
O
What do you need to know?
PY
Enumerate what is asked for in the following:
A. Rules for garnishing pastry products (7)
B. Sample of pastry presentations (3)
D
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you can
remember. Perform Self-Check 2.2.3 to find out how much you have
learned.
EP
E
Lesson Information
Standards and Principles to be follow in Decorating and Finishing Pastry
Products
Color of the Product - a color stimulates sense of sight and enhanced once
appetite. It is essential that the presentation and plating must be eyecatching.
D


Appearance - is about form and shape of pastry products after baking. It is
important that each piece/slice has the same size, shape and form.

Consistency - the uniformity in grains and texture. It is how it feels in the
mouth when eating.

Moisture Content - amount of moisture present in pastry products which
contribute in the moistness and softness of pastries. Moistness also enhance
flavor and palatability.
110
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Self-Check 2.2.3
Identify what is being described in the sentences below. Write your answer on
your test notebook.
C
O
PY
1. It refers to the uniformity in grains and texture.
2. It is the amount of moisture present in pastry products which contribute in the
moistness and softness of pastries.
3. It refers to the form and shape of pastry products after baking.
4. It stimulates sense of sight and enhanced once appetite.
LO3: Store Pastry Products
Store pastry products according to established standards and procedures.
Select packaging appropriate for the preservation of product freshness and
eating characteristics.
D


EP
E
Lesson Information
HOW TO STORE PASTRY PRODUCTS
Storing pastry products is one of the most important undertakings after
preparation wherein they are to be kept properly to avoid spoilage.
D
The table below indicates the proper way of storing pastries and where to store
them:
Pastry Products
Pies
Custard tart, nut with
custard base
Cream Puff and Eclair
Fruit Pies
Egg pie
How to store
Covered or
boxed
Covered or
boxed
Covered or
boxed
Covered or
boxed
Covered or
boxed
111
Where to store
Cool place or refrigerator to prevent
mold growth.
Must be refrigerated. Generally do
not freeze well after baking.
Cool place or refrigerator to prevent
mold growth.
Must be refrigerated. Generally do
not freeze well after baking.
Must be refrigerated. Generally do
not freeze well after baking.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Storing Pastry Products
As many pastry products contain egg and dairy products, they present a
potential health hazard if not stored properly. Remember: proper storage means that
pastries must be covered with plastic or placed in a box before storing.
Observe the following guidelines:
 Pastry products containing uncooked eggs should be handled with care, as raw
egg is a medium in which dangerous bacteria such as salmonella can thrive.
The custard filling of tart and pies contain protein which provides food for
bacteria. If the custard (crème caramel or trifle) is not heated and cooled
properly and quickly, bacteria that are present in the custard can grow
quickly to dangerous numbers.

Pastry products that are not required for immediate consumption must be
cooled rapidly and stored in the refrigerator until required.

If milk and cream are used, like in custards, they must not be left to stand at room
temperature for any length of time. They should be kept in the refrigerator until
the last possible moment to prevent the risk of food poisoning.
C
O
PY

EP
E
D
Equipment for Storing Pastries
1. chiller
2. freezer
3. refrigerator
Tips in Storing Pastry Products

D


Pastries are best consumed while fresh, but most keep longer when
refrigerated, and some can even be frozen.
Pastry dough may be frozen up to six months.
Unbaked pies will last about four months in the freezer, while baked berry pies
can be frozen for six to eight months.
Packaging Bakery Products
This lesson describes the skills and knowledge required to package and label
pastry products for storage and transportation. It requires the ability to correct
packaging materials. The main objective of packaging is to keep pastry products in
good condition until it is sold and consumed. Correct packaging is essential to
achieve these objectives.
112
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Definition of Packaging
Packaging refers to any material used to cover, contain, protect, handle, preserve,
identify, describe, promote, and market goods by a producer to the consumer.
Several factors are taken into consideration when designing an appropriate
packaging for goods, such as the size, shape, durability, space, and cost.
It plays a significant role especially when dealing with pastry products. Packaging
helps prolong its shelf life by preventing mechanical damage. It also helps in the
retention of the nutritive value of pastry products.
C
O
PY
Major Functions of Packaging
 Protect from mechanical damage in transit and loading and unloading
 Protect from loss of moisture and any foreign odor contaminations
 Protect from foreign body infestation.
 Legal compliance for values and ingredients for consumers
 Advertisement
Packaging Materials for Storing Pastries
2.
EP
E
3.
4.
Plastic container - Plastics are extremely useful as they can be made either
soft or hard forms, as sheets or containers, and with different thickness, light
resistance, and flexibility.
Plastic/cellophane – Transparent or colored plastic is usually used for
packaging tarts, pies and other types of pastries.
Aluminum foil
Paper/boxes
D
1.
Sample of pastry products packaging
D
Box Packaging for Pie
Paper Packaging
Box Packaging for Mini Pie
113
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Enhance your skills in packaging pastries.
Perform the activity below.
Activity 3.3.1
Prepare pastry products. Choose your own pastry recipe. Prepare all the needed
materials and ingredients. Perform actual preparation, presentation, packaging and
storing. Evaluate your output and performance using the rubric below.
PY
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
4 – Advanced. Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
C
O
3 – Proficient. Can perform this skill satisfactorily without assistance or
supervision.
2 - Approaching to Proficiency. Can perform this skill satisfactorily but requires
some assistance and/or supervision.
Dimension
D
1 – Basic. Can perform parts of this skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision.
EP
E
Excellent
(4 pts)
Performance Level
Very
Needs
Satisfactory
Satisfactory
Improvement
(3 pts )
( 2 pts)
(1 pts)
Points
Earned
D
Use of tools and
equipment
Application of
procedures
Safety work
habits
Completeness of
task
Time
management
114
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
How much have you learned?
Post-assessment
Read and analyze the statements carefully. Choose the best answer and write the
letter only in your answer sheet.
1. What important ingredient in pastries provides the moisture needed to
PY
develop gluten?
A. edible tallow
B. flour
C. salt
D. water
A.
B.
C.
D.
brown sugar
confectioner’s sugar
granulated sugar
refined sugar
C
O
2. What kind of sugar is primarily used in preparing icing?
3. What basic ingredient in baking improves aroma, flavor and nutrition in baked
EP
E
D
products?
A. baking powder
B. flour
C. shortening
D. sugar
4. Which of the baked goods are usually made of dough or have a crust made
D
out of enriched dough?
A. bread
B. pastry
C. pie
D. pizza
5. What kind of flour contains more gluten and less starch?
A.
B.
C.
D.
all-purpose flour
bread flour
cake flour
soft-flour
6. Which refers to personal cleanliness practice in baking?
A.
B.
C.
D.
combing the hair in the working area
keeping fingernails long
washing the hands after work
wearing an apron during working hours
115
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
7. Which type of light pastry is filled with whipped cream or a sweetened cream
filling and often topped with chocolate?
A. cream puff
B. Danish pastry
C. French pastries
D. pie and tart
A.
B.
C.
D.
memorize the recipe very well
use modern equipment
use only imported ingredients
measure ingredients accurately
A.
B.
C.
D.
3
5
10
16
C
O
9. How many cups are there in one gallon?
PY
8. What is the first step to have best results in baking?
10. What is the proper way to measure flour accurately?
level off with the use of the tines of a fork
shakes the measuring cup before leveling
shovel the flour
sift it before measuring
D
A.
B.
C.
D.
11. What is the substitute for 1 cup of whole milk?
½ cup evaporated milk plus ½ cup water
12∕3 cups sweet milk plus 1 tbsp. water
2 cups sweet milk plus 1/2 tbsp. water
2
∕3 cup sweet milk plus 1 tbsp. water
EP
E
A.
B.
C.
D.
D
12. What is the best substitute for two cups of pastry flour?
A. 1 cup sifted all-purpose flour
B. 1 cup sifted all-purpose flour plus 2∕3 cup cake flour
C. 1 cup minus 1 tbsp. sifted all-purpose flour
D. 1 cup minus 2 tbsp. sifted all-purpose flour
13. It is the simplest method in mixing the ingredients together with a utensil,
usually a spoon, using a circular motion.
A. beating
B. creaming
C. folding
D. stirring
116
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
14. It is the procedure of rubbing one or two ingredients against a bowl with the
tip of a wooden spoon or electric mixer.
A. beating
B. creaming
C. stirring
D. folding
PY
15. What is the outer part of a loaf bread or pastry?
A. crust
B. filling
C. muffins
D. topping
C
O
16. Which is a rich pastry filled with custard or fruit?
A. cream puff
B. Danish pastry
C. French pastries
D. pie and tart
D
17. What mixing technique in baking is usually used for meringue and for chiffon
products?
A. blending
B. folding
C. kneading
D. whisking
EP
E
18. What do you call the process of putting product into containers for easy
distribution?
A. labeling
B. packaging
C. storing
D. wrapping
D
19. It is one of the innovative methods of commercial food packaging
A. foil packaging
B. canned package
C. freezing packaging
D. chill packaging
20. What storing technique is used to draw, fold, and cover the bakery product?
A. chilling
B. folding
C. refrigerate
D. wrapping
117
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
GENERALIZATION
PY
This module gave opportunity to develop your skills
in Preparing and Producing Pastry Products according
to standard operating procedures, techniques and
knowledge of Bread and Pastry Production.
D
EP
E
D
C
O
This will prepare you to move on to the next
lessons to gain important skills in preparing pastry
products.
118
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
PY
Quarter 3
Overview
D
EP
E
D
C
O
Baking is cooking food in an oven, in hot ashes, or
in any oven-type appliances. Cake is one of the most
commonly baked products. Cakes are usually eaten during
special occasions such as birthdays, weddings,
anniversaries, and other celebrations. They are sweet,
made from a combination of liquid batters, and with high fat
and sugar contents. After baking, they are often decorated.
They can be of different shapes and sizes, and decorated
with a variety of toppings like fruit, candy, and frosting.
Tortes, on the other hand, are a type of cake that use
higher quality ingredients, which generally makes them
more expensive. Their name is derived from the German
word “torte”, which means cake.
119
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Definition of Terms
Type of cake made of meringue and flour
Appropriate
suitable or proper under the given circumstances
Assembling
fitting together the component parts of a certain dish or food
Bake
cook food in a dry heat method inside an oven
Batter
semi-liquid mixture of one or more flours combined with liquids
such as water, milk or eggs used to prepare various foods
Beating
introducing air into the mixture thru mechanical agitation as in
beating eggs
Blend
to combine ingredients and produce a homogenous mixture
Boiled icing
sugar and egg white icing for cakes; Sugar is first cooked on
the stovetop to form syrup, and then the hot syrup is beaten
into whipped egg whites. As the mixture is beaten it becomes
smooth, fluffy, and glossy.
Boiled icing
Italian meringue used as cake icing
Brown sugar
regular granulated sucrose containing various impurities that
give distinctive flavor
EP
E
D
C
O
PY
Angel food cake
Butter cream
icing made of butter and/or shortening blended with
confectioner’s sugar or sugar syrup, other ingredients may
also be added
Cake flour
fine, white flour made from soft wheat
D
Chemical leavener leaveners such as baking soda, baking powder, or baking
ammonia, which releases gases produced by chemical
reactions
Chiffon cake
light cake made following the chiffon method – cake mixing
method involving the folding
Choux pastry or pâte à choux – light pastry dough for making profiteroles,
croquembouche and éclairs
Cocoa powder
dry powder made from ground cocoa solids
Cocoa butter
white or yellowish fat found in natural chocolate
Commis
junior chef
120
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Confectioner’s sugar sucrose ground in to fine powder and mixed with a little
cornstarch to prevent caking
the way in which a certain substance, typically liquid, holds
together; (2) thickness or viscosity
Creaming
rubbing butter and sugar until light and fluffy
Creaming method
mixing method that begins with the blending of fat and sugar;
used for cakes, cookies and similar items
Dark chocolate
Sweetened chocolate consist of chocolate liquor and sugar
Dust
To sprinkle the surface with flour to avoid mixture to stick on it
Filling
Edible mixture used to fill pastries, sandwiches, or cakes
PY
Consistency
C
O
Filling, coating, topping quantity of material that fills or is used to fill something, or
is used to coat, or is used to design the top of food
Continuously beat egg white to incorporate air until it becomes
light and fluffy.
Fondant
type of icing made of boiled sugar syrup that is agitated so that
it would crystallize into a mass of extremely small white
crystals.
Frost
cover cakes with icing
rich cream made of chocolate and heavy cream.
EP
E
Ganache
D
Foaming
decorate or embellish something, especially food
Gateau
French word for cake
Gateau, torte
rich cake, typically one containing layers of cream or fruit.
Genoise
sponge cake made by whipping whole eggs with sugar and
folding in flour and sometimes, melted butter.
D
Garnishing
Glaze
shiny coating such as syrup, applied to a food; to make a food
shiny or glossy by coating it with a glaze or by browning it
under a broiled or in a hot oven.
Granulated sugar
sucrose in a fine crystalline form
Grease
brush pan with shortening.
Gum paste
type of sugar paste or pastillage made from vegetable gum.
Petit four
small confectionery or savory appetizer means “small oven” in
French.
Pre-heat
heat the oven prior to baking to achieve the required heat
121
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
to remove sticky
mixing bowl.
ingredients
from
the
side
of
the
Sift
to pass the flour through the sieves to make it finer
and light.
Sponge
batter or dough of yeast, flour and water that is allowed to
ferment and is then mixed with more flour and other
ingredients to make a bread dough.
Sponge cake
type of cake made by whipping eggs and sugar to a foam,
then folding in flour
Sweet paste
sweet doughy candy or confection.
Tortes
German for various types of cakes, usually layer cakes
Turntable
pedestal with a flat, rotating top used for holding cakes while
they are being decorated
Whip
to beat rapidly and continuously to aid incorporation of air as in
whipping egg whites to make meringue and in cream.
D
EP
E
D
C
O
PY
Scrape
122
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
What do you need to know?
Pre-assessment
PY
Let us determine how much you already know about preparing and
presenting gateau, tortes and cakes. Take this test.
Read and analyze the statement carefully. Choose the best answer and write the
letter only in your answer sheet.
A.
B.
C.
D.
baking
broiling
grilling
stewing
C
O
1. It refers to dry heat cooking which usually takes place in oven.
2. It refers to fine white flour made from soft wheat which contains 7-9%
EP
E
D
protein.
A. all-purpose flour
B. bread flour
C. cake flour
D. pastry flour
3. Which is a light cake made of meringue and flour?
D
A.
B.
C.
D.
angel food cake
batter cake
chiffon cake
sponge cake
4. Which refers to getting the right number of serving from a recipe and
serving the right amount?
A. mark-up
B. portion control
C. weight
D. yield
123
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
5. Which refers to a method of dividing cake into uniform pieces before
serving?
A. counting
B. cutting
C. measuring
D. weighing
6. Which method of portioning is done with the use of a food scale?
counting
cutting
measuring
weighing
PY
A.
B.
C.
D.
7. What sweet soluble organic compound belongs to the carbohydrate group
C
O
of foods?
A. flour
B. milk
C. shortening
D. sugar
8. This very fine sugar dissolves faster and is perfect for making meringue.
D
caster sugar
confectioner’s sugar
granulated sugar
white sugar
EP
E
A.
B.
C.
D.
9. What sugar is pulverized into powder to prevent caking?
caster sugar
confectioner’s sugar
granulated sugar
white sugar
D
A.
B.
C.
D.
10. Which basic ingredient in baking helps attain tenderness by preventing
cohesion of gluten strands?
A. leavening
B. liquid
C. shortening
D. sugar
124
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
11. It refers to heating the oven to attain the required baking temperature
before baking.
A. baking
B. proofing
C. preheating
D. broiling
PY
12. This type of cake contains a high percentage of fat or shortening.
A. batter type cake
B. chiffon
C. foam type cake
D. unshortened cake
C
O
13. It is a combination of shortened and foam type cake.
A. batter type cake
B. chiffon
C. foam type cake
D. unshortened cake
EP
E
D
14. Which contains less than 5% fats?
A. batter type cake
B. chiffon
C. foam type cake
D. unshortened cake
D
15. What coating is applied to food to make the food shiny or glossy?
A. custard
B. ganache
C. glaze
D. syrup
16. Which is a kind of icing that is made out of butter and/or shortening
blended with confectioner’s sugar or sugar syrup?
A. butter cream
B. custard
C. ganache
D. syrup
125
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
17. Which is a rich cream made of chocolate and heavy cream?
A. butter cream
B. custard
C. ganache
D. syrup
PY
18. Which edible mixture is used to fill pastries, sandwiches, or cakes?
A. butter cream
B. custard
C. filling
D. ganache
19. What type of icing is made of boiled sugar syrup so that it would
C
O
crystallize into a mass of extremely small white crystals?
A. butter cream
B. custard
C. filling
D. fondant
3 days
4 days
5 days
6 days
D
EP
E
A.
B.
C.
D.
D
20. Custard filling can be stored in the refrigerator for up to how many days?
126
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Lesson 3: PREPARE AND PRESENT GATEAUX, TORTES, AND
CAKES
EXPECTED OUTCOMES:
C
O
LO1. Prepare sponge and cakes
LO2. Prepare and use fillings
LO3. Decorate cakes
LO4. Present cakes
LO5. Store cakes
PY
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to:
LO1. Prepare Sponges and Cakes

EP
E

Select, measure, and weigh ingredients according to recipe requirements,
enterprise practices and customer practices.
Select required oven temperature to bake goods in accordance with desired
characteristics, standard recipe specifications and enterprise practices.
Prepare sponges and cakes according to recipe specifications, techniques
and conditions and desired product characteristics.
Use appropriate equipment according to required pastry and bakery products
and standard operating procedures.
Cool the sponges and cakes according to established standards and
procedures.
D


D

What do you need to know?
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you can
remember. Find out how much you can learn by doing Self-Check 3.1.
127
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Lesson Information
Measuring Ingredients Properly
It is important to measure the ingredients accurately to get standard products
and efficient use of materials.
Dry Ingredients
PY
1. Flour
Sift the flour to remove lumps and scoop it to fill the measuring cup until it
overflows. Do not shake the measuring cup but level the flour with a spatula
or the edge of a knife.
C
O
2. Baking Powder/Baking Soda
Remove the lumps by stirring. Dip the measuring spoon into the powder or
scoop the baking powder or baking soda, then level it off with a spatula.
3. Powdered Milk
Remove the lumps by stirring. Scoop lightly to fill the measuring cup
without shaking until it overflows. Use the spatula or the straight edge of a
knife to level the measurement.
EP
E
D
4. White Sugar
Sifting is not necessary unless it is lumpy. Fill the measuring cup or scoop
the sugar until it overflows. Do not shake the measuring cup but level the
sugar with a spatula or the edge of a knife.
D
5. Brown Sugar
Roll out the lumps, remove the dirt and pack into the measuring cup until
the sugar follows the shape of the cup when inverted. When removed from the
measuring cup, the brown sugar will be molded into the shape of the cup if
packed properly.
Liquid Ingredients
A liquid measuring cup is used to measure large quantities of liquids. Set the
cup on a level surface. Never lift the cup while pouring the liquid. Read the scale
from the side of the cup.
Solid Fats
Fill the measuring cup with shortening and press down until it is full. Level the
fat with the spatula or the edge of a knife.
128
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
How much did you learn?
Self-Check
Self-Check
1.1 3.1.1
PY
Match column A with the appropriate words in column B. Choose the letter of the
correct answer and write it on your answer sheet.
A
B
C
O
1. Fill the measuring cup with the shortening
while pressing until it is full. Level the fat with
the spatula or the edge of a knife
D
2. Sift to remove lumps and scoop it to fill the
measuring cup until it overflows. Do not shake
the measuring cup but level it with a spatula
or the edge of a knife
EP
E
3. Sifting is not necessary unless it is lumpy. Fill
the measuring cup or scoop until it overflows.
Do not shake the measuring cup. Level off
with spatula or the edge of a knife
4. Remove the lumps by stirring. Dip the
measuring spoon then level it off with a
spatula.
D
5. A graduated measuring cup is used. Set the
cup on a level surface. Never lift the cup while
measuring. Read the scale from the side of
the cup.
129
a. Liquid ingredients
b. Solid fats
c. Flour
d. Baking powder/
baking soda
e. White sugar
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Enhance your skills in measuring ingredients.
Perform activity below.
Activity 3.1.1
PY
Group yourselves into five. Assign a leader for each group. With the use of standard
measuring tools, practice the proper way of measuring ingredients following the
steps given. Leader must check/monitor the performance of each member. Repeat
the steps until all members can measure all the ingredients properly. After the
activity, accomplish the Scoring Rubrics/Checklist provided below.
C
O
How well did you perform? Find out by accomplishing
the Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely. Remember
it is your learning that is at stake.
D
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
EP
E
4 - Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and adaptability to
problem situations.
3 - Can perform this skill satisfactorily without assistance or supervision.
2 - Can perform this skill satisfactorily but requires some assistance and/or
supervision.
D
1 - Can perform parts of this skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision.
130
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
Flour
Sifted the flour to remove lumps and scooped it to fill the
measuring. Leveled the flour with a spatula or the edge of a
knife.
1
2
3
4
PY
Baking Powder/Baking Soda
Removed the lumps by stirring. Dipped the measuring spoon
into the powder or scoop the baking powder or baking soda,
then leveled it off with a spatula.
Powdered Milk
Removed the lumps by stirring. Scooped lightly to fill the
measuring cup without shaking until it overflows. Used the
spatula or the straight edge of a knife to level the measurement.
EP
E
D
C
O
Sugar
Filled the measuring cup or scooped the sugar until it overflows.
Did not shake the measuring cup but leveled the sugar with a
spatula or the edge of a knife.
Brown Sugar
Rolled out the lumps, removed the dirt and packed into the
measuring cup until the sugar follows the shape of the cup when
inverted. When removed from the measuring cup, the brown
sugar will be molded into the shape of the cup if packed
properly.
Solid Fats
Filled the measuring cup with the shortening while pressing until
it is full. Leveled the fat with the spatula or the edge of a knife.
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how
much you can remember. Then find out how much
you have learned by doing Self-Check 3.1.2.
D
Lesson Information
Portion Control, Yields, Weights and Sizes
What is Portion Control?
Portion control means getting the right number of servings from a recipe and
serving the right amount. It requires following the standardized recipes exactly. It
involves planning menus carefully, purchasing an adequate amount of food,
preparing, storing, and serving food.
Importance of Portion Control
1. It provides the correct serving size to meet the nutritional needs.
2. It helps control costs.
131
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
3. It helps minimize waste.
4. It helps to guide the ordering and preparation of food.
5. It is a contributing factor in giving a consistent yield and portion size.
6. Customers know exactly how much food to expect.
7. Customers get the same portion size
D
EP
E
D
Cake Cutting Guide
C
O
PY
Methods of Portion Control
• Cutting – a method of dividing food into uniform pieces before it is placed on
the serving line.
Examples: sheet cakes, rolls, or brownies
•
Weighing – a method that makes use of a food scale to create portions
based on weight
•
Measuring - a method of portioning food on the serving line that involves the
use of scoops or ladles
132
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
•
Counting - name or list (the units of a group or collection) one by one in
order to determine the total number
C
O
PY
Suggestions for Controlling Portions
1. Follow the recipes accurately when measuring and weighing ingredients.
2. Be sure the servers know the planned portion size for each baked products to
be served.
3. Prepare a sample tray or plate before serving to visualize the amount to
serve.
4. Use the correct type and the correct size portion control tool for each food
item.
How much did you learn?
D
Self-Check
Self-Check
1.23.1.2
D
EP
E
Identify what is described in the sentences below. Write your answer on your answer
sheet.
1. Getting the right number of servings from a recipe and serving the right
amount
2. Method of dividing food into uniform pieces before it is placed on the serving
line
3. Method of portioning food on the serving line that involves the use of scoops,
or ladles
4. Method performed using a food scale
5. Naming or listing (the units of a group or collection) one by one in order to
determine the total number
What do you need to know?
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you can
remember. Find out how much you have learned by doing SelfCheck 3.1.3.
133
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Lesson Information
Cake Ingredients
1. Cake Flour
Cake Flour is a finely ground meal obtained by grinding and milling cereal
grains. It contains 7-9% protein content and is made from soft wheat flour. It is good
for making cakes and cookies where a tender and delicate texture is desired.
PY
2. Sugar
C
O
Effects of Sugar in Baking
 Makes the color of the crust brown or richer
This is due to the Maillard reaction. It is a chemical reaction wherein
protein and sugar react together when subjected to high temperature.
Improves the nutritional value, flavor and aroma of the product.
Sugar has the most pronounced effect on flavor where it sweetens the
product.

Makes the cakes tender.
In cakes, the heat of baking causes the starch in flour to absorb liquid and
swell. This process is called gelatinization. As more liquid is absorbed by
the starch, the batter goes from a fluid to a solid state. Sugar acts to slow
gelatinization by competing with the starch for liquid. By absorbing part of
the liquid, sugar maintains the viscosity of the batter. As a result, the
temperature at which the cake “sets” (turning from liquid to solid state) is
delayed until the optimum amount of gases are produced by the
leavening agents. Carbon dioxide, air and steam produced from
leavening agents, heated water, and air become entrapped and expand in
the air cells. The result is a fine, uniformly-grained cake with a soft,
smooth crumb texture. As described above, sugar is effective in delaying
starch gelatinization in cakes and provides good texture and volume.
D
EP
E
D


Contributes to moisture content of cakes
Increased retention of moisture due to sugar content gives the baked
products longer shelf life by increasing its storing quality.

Acts as creaming agent.
Sugar crystals become interspersed among the shortening molecules
when shortening and sugar are creamed together. In cakes and cookies,
134
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
sugar helps promote lightness by incorporating air into the shortening. Air
is trapped on the face of sugar’s irregular crystals. When sugar is mixed
with shortening, this air becomes incorporated as very small air cells.
During baking, these air cells expand when filled with carbon dioxide and
other gases from the leavening agent.
Sugar serves as a whipping aid to stabilize beaten egg foam.
In foam-type cakes, sugar interacts with egg proteins to stabilize the
whipped foam structure. In doing so, sugar makes the egg foam more
elastic so that air cells can expand and take up gases from the leavening
agent.
PY

3. Eggs
D
EP
E
D
C
O
Use of Eggs in Baking
 Thickening agent. The use of egg as a thickening agent is possible
when the protein of an egg coagulates when heated.
 Binding agent. The coagulation of protein and the viscosity of uncooked
eggs are why eggs are used as binding agents. They are used as a
coating to hold crumbs together for crust formation on breaded foods.
Coagulation increases the rigidity of cell walls and of crusts in different
types of dough and batter.
 Emulsifying agent. Lipoproteins which are present in yolk make it
valuable as an emulsifying agent.
 Leavening agent. The surface activity of the proteins of egg also make
the egg valuable in the production of a film that holds air which may be
used to aid in the leavening of various food mixtures. The air beaten into
the egg does the leavening but the characteristics of the egg make it
possible for the air to be held in a product.
 Color. The yolk provides a desirable yellow color which renders the cake
a rich appearance.
 Richness. The fat and other solids present in the eggs increase the fat
content and make the product taste sweeter.
 Flavor. Eggs contain flavor which makes the product more desirable.
 Freshness and nutritive value. The moisture content of eggs (75% for
whole eggs) coupled with its natural ability of binding and retaining
moisture, retards staling. Eggs are high in value and contribute a lot to the
value of baked products as a food. They are rich in calcium, phosphorous
and iron. They contain complete proteins which supplies all of the amino
acids required to maintain growth and good health. They also supply
important amounts of vitamin A, D, thiamine and riboflavin.
135
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
4. Shortening
Uses of Shortening in Baking
 Makes products tender and improves flavor.
 Assists in gas retention giving better volume and crust.
 Prevents the cohesion of gluten.
 Improves the aroma, color and texture of baked products.
 Improves the shelf life of baked products because of its moisture.
PY
5. Leavening Agent
C
O
6. Liquid Ingredients
How much did you learn?
Self-Check 3.1.3
Self-Check 1.3
D
Match the definitions in Column A with the terms in Column B. Write your answer on
your answer sheet.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B
water
shortening
leavening
flour
eggs
D
C.
EP
E
A.
A
Finely ground powder obtained by grinding and/or
milling cereal grains
Cheapest ingredient in baking. It helps dissolve all
other ingredients into batter and form a smooth,
workable mixture.
It is considered the most costly ingredient in baking.
It represents almost 50% of the total cost of baked
products.
Made from hydrogenated vegetable oil. It contains
80-85 percent fat and 10-15 percent water.
Gases that cause the batter to rise. It also increases
tenderness when any fat is added to a flour mixture.
D.
E.
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you
can remember. Find out how much you have learned by doing
Self-Check 3.1.4.
136
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Lesson Information
sheetsh
Temperature Use for Different Types of Cakes
Baking Temperature and Time
Temperature
(F)
Temperature
(C)
Minutes
Cupcake
350-375
177-190
15 to 25
Layer Cake
350 -375
Loaf Cake
350
PY
Cakes types
177-190
20 to 35
177
45 to 60
C
O
Angel Food &
350
177
50 to 60
Sponge
Philippine Home Economics Baking Basics by Nancy Cameros Gonzales
D
Importance of Pre-Heating an Oven
It is important to preheat your oven before baking. Baked items depend on
the correct oven temperature to help them rise properly. All baked recipes are tested
in preheated ovens. Place the oven racks at the proper levels first, and then set the
temperature stated in the recipe.
EP
E
Classifications of Cakes
 High-fat or Shortened Cakes - a type of cake which contains a high
percentage of fat or shortening.
Low-fat or Foam-type Cakes - also known as unshortened cake which
contains less than 5% fat.

Modified Sponge Cake - combination of shortened cake and foam-type cake.
D

137
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Baking Tools and Equipment
Icing spatula is used to apply and
spread icing, frosting and butter
cream.
C
O
PY
Mixing bowl is a deep hallow dish
used
for
mixing
baking
ingredients.
Rubber scraper is a flat tool used
to scrape any mixture and collect
every bit of the mixture out of a
bowl.
D
EP
E
D
Liquid measuring cup is a
transparent cup with lines, called
marker lines, to indicate the
volume of liquid. Size varies from
¼ to 5 cups or for volumes about
50 ml and above.
Measuring cups are a set of
marked cups used to measure
both liquid and dry ingredients.
138
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Measuring spoons are a set of
spoons with amount indicated in
the handle used in measuring
small amounts of ingrediets less
than ¼ cup.
C
O
PY
Weighing scale is a device used
in measuring ingredients.
EP
E
D
Smart scale is a device used in
measuring ingredients.
D
Grater is a device made of metal
with holes surrounded by sharp
edges used to grate food into
small pieces like cheeze.
Chopping board is a tool usually
made of wood or plastic used for
cutting ingredients.
139
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Cake pan is a container used in
baking cakes.
C
O
PY
Sifter is a tool used to separate
coarse particles of sugar and flour.
Oven is an enclosed compartment
used for baking.
D
EP
E
D
Can openers are used in opening
canned ingredients like milk.
140
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
EP
E
D
C
O
PY
Refrigerator and Cooler are
appliances used for cooling cakes.
Rotary egg beater is a handled
device used in beating eggs,
cream and other liquids.
D
Thermometer is a device used in
monitoring the temperature of the
oven.
Wire whisk is a kitchen tool in the
form of stiff, thin wire loops attach
to a handle used to blend
ingredients together.
141
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Blender is a device used in
blending or mixing ingredients
thoroughly.
C
O
PY
Angel food cake pan is a
container primarily used in baking
angel food cake.
Parchment Paper is a waterproof
and grease resistant paper placed
in the bottom of the pan.
D
EP
E
D
Angel food cake knife is a tool
used in cutting angel food cake.
142
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
PY
A mixer is a kitchen tool used for
stirring, whisking or beating.
D
EP
E
D
C
O
Pastry brush is also known as
basting brush similar to a small
paint brush and is used to spread
butter, oil or glaze on food and for
coating baking pans with grease
or shortening.
Cooling rack is a layered tool
made of wires with short legs used
for cooling baked products.
Baking shear is used in cutting
parchment paper used in baking.
143
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Mixing methods used for cakes
A. Creaming Method (for shortened cakes)
The creaming method, also called the conventional method, was for a long
time the standard method for mixing high-fat cakes. The development of
emulsified, or high-ratio, shortening sled to the development of simpler mixing
methods for shortened cakes containing greater amounts of sugar and liquid.
Creaming Method Procedure
2.
EP
E
D
C
O
3.
Scale ingredients accurately. Have all ingredients at room temperature
(70°F/21°C).
Place the butter or shortening in the mixing bowl. With the paddle
attachment, beat the fat slowly, until it is smooth and creamy.
Add the sugar; cream the mixture at moderate speed until the mixture is light
and fluffy. This will take about 8 to 10 minutes.
PY
1.
Some bakers prefer to add the salt and flavorings with the sugar to
ensure uniform distribution. If melted chocolate is used, it may beaten during
creaming.
Add the eggs a little at a time, after each addition, beat until the eggs are
absorbed before adding more. After the eggs are beaten in, mix until light
and fluffy. This step will take about 5 minutes.
D
4.
144
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
5. Scrape down the sides of the bowl to ensure even mixing.
Add the sifted dry ingredients (including the spices), alternating with the
liquids. The reason for adding dry and liquid ingredients alternately is the
batter may not absorb all the liquid unless some of the flour is present.
PY
6.
D
C
O
B. Two-Stage Method
The two-stage mixing method is a little simpler than the creaming method,
and it produces a smooth batter that bakes up into a fine-grained, moist cake. The
name originated from the practice of adding the liquids are added in two stages. The
first step in making high-ratio cakes is to blend the flour and other dry ingredients
with shortening. When this mixture is smooth, the liquids (including eggs) are added
in stages.
EP
E
Throughout this procedure, it is important to follow two rules
1. Mix at low speed and observe correct mixing times. This is important to
develop proper texture.
2. Stop the machine and scrape down the sides of the bowl frequently during
mixing. This is important to develop a smooth, well-mixed batter.
D
C. One-Stage (Liquid Shortening) Method
This method involves adding the liquid ingredients to the bowl first which
simplifies the procedure. In this way, there is less chance for moistened flour to coat
the bottom and sides of the bowl, making scraping down difficult. Mix at low speed
until the dry ingredients are moistened, to prevent dry flour from being thrown from
the bowl. Mix for a period at high speed, followed by a period at medium speed, to
properly develop air cells and create a smooth, fine-textured batter.
1. Scale all ingredients accurately. Have all ingredients at room temperature.
2. Combine all liquid ingredients, including high-ratio liquid shortening, in the
mixing bowl.
145
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
3. Sift the dry ingredients together on top of the liquid ingredients in the bowl.
C
O
PY
4. With the paddle attachment, mix at low speed for 30 seconds until the dry
ingredients are moistened. (The purpose of mixing slowly until the dry
ingredients are moistened is to keep them from being thrown out of the bowl).
EP
E
D
5. Mix at high speed for 4 minutes. Stop the machine and scrape down the bowl
and beater. Mix at medium speed for 3 minutes.
D
D. Flour-Batter Method
The flour-batter method is used for only a few specialty items. It produces a
fine-textured cake, but there may be some toughening due to the development of
gluten. Flour-batter cakes include those made with either emulsified shortening or
butter or both.
Flour-Batter Method Procedure
1. Scale all ingredients accurately. Have all ingredients at room temperature.
2. Sift the flour and other dry ingredients except the sugar into the mixing bowl.
Add the fat. Blend together until smooth and light.
146
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
3. Whip the sugar and eggs together until thick and light. Add liquid flavoring
ingredients, such as vanilla.
4. Combine the flour-fat mixture and the sugar-egg mixture and mix until
smooth.
5. Gradually add water or milk (if any) and mix smooth.
E. Sponge Methods
PY
Many types of sponge method cakes have one characteristic in common:
they are made with egg foam that contains yolks. These are usually whole-egg
foams but, in some cases, the base foam is yolk foam, and egg white foam is
folded in at the end of the procedure.
Plain Sponge Method
C
O
Sponge cake batter is made in two basic steps:
1. Eggs and sugar are whipped to a thick foam, and
2. Sifted flour is folded in.
D
EP
E
D
1. Scale all ingredients accurately.
2. Combine the eggs, sugar, and salt in a stainless steel bowl. Immediately set
the bowl over a hot-water bath and stir or beat with a whip until the mixture
warms to a temperature of about 110°F (43°C) The reason for this step is that
the foam attains greater volume if warm.
3. With a wire whip or the whip attachment of a mixer, beat the eggs at high
speed until they are very light and thick. This may take as long as 10 to
15minutes if the quantity is large.
147
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
4. If any liquid (water, milk, liquid flavoring) is included, add it now. Either whip it
in, in a steady stream, or stir it in, as indicated in the recipe.
EP
E
D
C
O
5. Fold in the sifted flour in 3 or 4 stages, being careful not to deflate the foam.
Many bakers do this by hand, even for large batches. Fold gently until all the
flour is blended in. If any other dry ingredients are used, such as cornstarch
or baking powder, sift them first with the flour.
6. Immediately pan and bake the batter. Delays will cause loss of volume.
D
E. Angel Food Method
Angel food cakes are based on egg-white foams and contain no fat. Angel
food method should be whipped until they form soft, not stiff, peaks. Over whipped
whites lose their capability to expand and to leave the cake. This is because the
protein network in stiffly beaten whites has already stretched as far as it can. If the
whites are whipped to soft peaks instead, they can stretch more during baking,
allowing the cake to rise.
Angel Food Method Procedure
1. Scale ingredients accurately. Have all ingredients at room temperature. The
egg whites may be slightly warmed in order to achieve better volume.
148
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
PY
2. Sift the flour with half the sugar. This step helps the flour mix more evenly
with the foam.
3. Using the whip attachment beat the egg whites until they form soft peaks.
Add salt and cream of tartar near the beginning of the beating process
EP
E
D
C
O
4. Gradually beat in the portion of the sugar that was not mixed with the flour.
Continue to whip until the egg whites form soft; moist peaks. Do not beat until
stiff. Beat in the flavorings.
D
5. Fold in the flour-sugar mixture just until it is thoroughly absorbed.
149
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
6. Deposit the mix in ungreased pans and bake immediately.
C
O
PY
F. Chiffon Method
Chiffon cakes and angel food cakes are both based on egg-white foams, but
here the similarities in the mixing methods end. In angel food cakes, a dry floursugar mixture is folded into the egg whites. In the chiffon method, a batter
containing flour, egg yolks, vegetable oil, and water is folded into the whites. Egg
whites for chiffon cakes should be whipped until they are a little firmer than those
for angel food cakes, but not so much that they become dry. Chiffon cakes contain
baking powder, so they do not depend on the egg foam for all their leavening.
D
EP
E
D
Chiffon Method Procedure
1. Scale all ingredients accurately. Have all ingredients at room temperature.
Use a good-quality, flavorless vegetable oil.
2. Sift the dry ingredients, including part of the sugar, into the mixing bowl
3. Mixing with the paddle attachment at second speed, gradually add the oil,
then the egg yolks and the water and liquid flavorings, all in a slow, steady
stream.
While adding the liquids, stop the machine several times to scrape down the
bowl and the beater. Mix until smooth, but do not over mix.
4. Whip the egg whites until they form soft peaks. Add the cream of tartar and
sugar in a stream and whip to firm, moist peaks.
150
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
5. Fold the whipped egg whites into the flour-liquid mixture.
PY
6. Immediately deposit the batter in ungreased center tube pans (like angel food
cake pans) or in layer pans with only the bottoms greased and dusted, not the
sides (like sponge layers).
C
O
G. Combination Creaming/Sponge Method
Some are begun by using the creaming method. In other words, butter is
creamed with sugar until the mixture is light. However, instead, whipped egg
whites are folded into the batter, as for some sponge cakes.
EP
E
D
Combination Creaming/Sponge Method Procedure
1. Cream the butter and sugar.
D
2. Add the egg yolks a little at a time.
3. Mix well after each addition.
151
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
4. Whip the egg whites and sugar until they form soft peaks, as for angel food
cake.
C
O
PY
6. Fold the meringue into the butter mixture.
EP
E
D
7. Sift the dry ingredients together.
D
8. Fold in the sifted dry ingredients.
9. Pour the batter in prepared pans.
152
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
10. Level the top of the batter with a plastic.
C
O
PY
The three main goals of mixing cake batters are
1. Combine all ingredients into a smooth, uniform batter.
2. Form and incorporate air cells in the batter.
3. Develop the proper texture in the finished product
How much did you learn?
D
Self-Check 3.1.4
D
EP
E
Match the definition in column A with the terms in column B. Write your answer in
your answer sheet.
A
B
1. Sponge Method
A. It also called the conventional
method and the standard method
for mixing high-fat cakes.
B. A type of cake which contain high
2. One-Stage Method
percentage off at or shortening.
C. A butter containing flour, egg yolks,
3.Creaming Method
vegetable oil, and water is folded into
the whites.
D. Butter is creamed with sugar until the 4. Chiffon Method
mixture is light then; whipped egg
whites are folded into the butter.
5. High-fat or Shortened
E. All in one step. It is adding the liquid
Cakes
ingredients to the bowl first.
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you
can remember. Find out how much you have learned by doing
Self-check 3.1.5.
153
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Lesson Information
EP
E
D
C
O
PY
Basic Steps in Baking
1. Read the recipe carefully to know if you have all the ingredients and the
utensils needed and if you understand the entire procedure.
2. Check all the necessary ingredients gather and arrange them according to
the sequence of their preparation.
3. Prepare all the utensils needed for measuring, mixing, and baking.
4. Preheat the oven. Set the oven knob at the desired temperature.
5. Prepare the pan/pans needed; make sure to use the correct pan size. If it
needs greasing, brushing the pan bottom with a little shortening. For baking
purposes, don’t use butter or margarine for greasing because these easily
burn and will produce a very brown crust.
6. Measure the ingredients using correct utensils according to the amounts
required in the recipe.
7. Mix the batter or dough when filling pans, makes sure you don’t overfill. Fill
about 2/3 full to give an allowance for the rising.
8. Bake in the preheated oven. Put the pan at the center rack.
9. Test for doneness. For butter cakes, prick the center of the cake with a
toothpick. If it comes out clean then it is done. For chiffon and sponge cakes
press lightly with fingers. If it springs back then it is done. Pies and pastries
are done when the crusts have turned golden brown, crisp and flaky.
10. Cool the baked products. For butter cakes, put the pan on a wire rack and
leave to cool for 10 minutes. Afterwards, invert pan to remove the cake and
cool it completely. For sponge and chiffon cakes, invert pans at once in wire
racks. Then, decorate.
D
Baking guidelines:
1. Preheat oven to desired/prescribed temperature.
2. Check oven racks are properly placed.
3. Arrange baking pans of similar shapes inside the oven one inch apart from
all sides.
4. Follow correct oven temperature prescribed by the recipe. Incorrect oven
temperature results to poor volume, texture, form and color.
5. Avoid opening the oven while baking.
6. Cool cakes by using a cake rack. To remove cakes from the pan, slide a
spatula around the pan and turn upside down.
Testing for Doneness
1. Use a cake tester to determine doneness of a cake by inserting at the center
of the cake. When the cake tester comes out clean, the cake is baked.
2. The cake springs back on top and sides when pressed.
3. The cake shrinks away from the sides of the pan.
154
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Other Baking Guidelines
PY
1. Observe proper handling of ingredients and equipment in baking to attain a
perfect cake.
2. The process of mixing, scaling and measuring baking ingredients including the
cooling method should be done accurately to prevent a soggy baked product
or cakes.
3. For sheet cakes, put a parchment paper at the bottom of the pan for ease in
turning it upside down. Sprinkle granulated sugar on top of the sheet cake
before turning it upside down.
4. Cool angel food cakes, add chiffon cakes by sliding a spatula around the pan,
and slowly turn it upside down to hold back the volume of the cake.
C
O
Professional Baking Sixth Edition by WAYNE GISSLEN Chapter 16 p393
How much did you learn?
Self-Check 1.5
D
Self-Check 3.1.5
EP
E
Arrange the following steps in baking a cake chronologically, placing 1 for the first
step up to 10 for the final step. Write your answers on your answer sheet.
D
A. Test for doneness.
B. Mix the batter or dough when filling pans
C. Read the recipe carefully to know if you have all the ingredients and the
utensils needed.
D. Check all the necessary ingredients needed in baking the cake.
E. Preheat the oven. Set the oven knob at the desired temperature.
F. Prepare all the utensils needed for measuring, mixing, and baking.
G. Prepare the pan/pans needed; make sure to use the correct pan size.
H. Measure the ingredients using correct utensils according to the amounts
required in the recipe.
I. Pull the pan at the center rack.
J. Cool the baked products.
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you can
remember. Find out how much you have learned by doing
Self-check 3.1.6.
155
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson Information
Downloaded
from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Common Cake Problems and their Causes
Problem
Too light
Burst or cracked
Soggy
EP
E
Texture
Dense or heavy
PY
Crust
Too dark
C
O
Uneven shape
Too little flour
Too much liquid
Too little leavening
Oven too hot
Improper mixing
Batter spread unevenly
Uneven oven heat
Oven racks not level
Cake pans warped
Too much sugar
Oven too hot
Too little sugar
Oven not hot enough
Too much flour or flour too strong
Too little liquid
Improper mixing
Oven too hot
Underbaked
Cooling in pans or with not enough ventilation
Wrapping before cool
Too little leavening
Too much liquid
Too much sugar
Too much shortening
Oven not hot enough
Too much leavening
Too little egg
Improper mixing
Too much leavening
Too much shortening
Too much sugar
Wrong kind of flour
Improper mixing
Flour too strong
Too much flour
Too little sugar or shortening
Over mixing
Poor-quality ingredients
Poor storage or sanitation
Unbalanced formula
D
Volume and Shape
Poor Volume
Causes
Coarse or irregular
D
Crumbly
Tough
Poor Flavor
https://books.google.com/books?isbn=0470197528 Professional baking
156
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
How much did you learn?
Self-Check 3.1.6
Read and analyze the statement concept carefully. Match column A with column B.
Write your answer on your answer sheet.
B
1. Too dark
2. Crumbly
3. Soggy
4. Burst or cracked
5. Uneven shape
C
O
PY
A
A. Under baked
B. Too much flour or flour too
strong
C. Batter spread unevenly;
uneven oven heat
D. Too much sugar oven too hot
E. Too much leavening; too
much shortening
D
Enhance your skills in baking by performing
the following activity.
EP
E
Suggested projects: Let us try
Form a group of five. Divide the work among yourselves as you follow the
recipe given below. After the activity, accomplish the Scoring Rubrics checklist
provided below.
D
Activity 3.1.2
Cake Butter
Ingredients
 3 ½ cups cake flour
 1 ½ tablespoon baking powder
 ¾ cup butter or margarine
157
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com






1 ¼ cups sugar
½ tsp salt
4 eggs
¾ cup evaporated milk
½ cup water
1 ½ tsp vanilla
Baking temperature: 350 Fahrenheit
Baking time:
45 minutes to 1 hour
PY
Procedure
1. Sift together flour and baking powder. Set aside
2. Cream butter and sugar. Blend eggs one at a time, until sugar is dissolve
3. In another bowl, combine milk, water and vanilla
4. Add the flour mixture and the milk mixture, starting and ending with flour.
Pour into prepared pan
Characteristics
Excellent
(5)
D
Standard Score Sheet Butter Cake
C
O
Find out how well you performed by accomplishing the
Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely. Remember it is
our learning that is at stake.
Very
Good (4)
Good
(3)
Fair
(2)
Poor
(1)
D
EP
E
Outer
1. Shape: Sponge cake-uniform; free
from cracks; Chiffon cake-slightly
rounded top
2. Size: Very lightweight in proportion
size
3. Color: Chiffon cake-uniform golden
brown; Sponge cake-light brown
4. Crust: tender, free from spots or
moist, shiny appearance (sponge);
cracked on surface (chiffon)
Inside
1. Color: Uniform; characteristics of a
kind of cake
2. Grain: Small uniform, thin walled cells;
no large air spaces, or compact layer;
springly crumb
3. Texture: tender; velvety moist; light;
not compact or soggy
4. Flavor: Pleasing, delicate; uniform
SCORE:
Comments:
158
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Enhance your skills in baking by preparing a
cake roll or Swiss roll using the recipe below.
Activity 3.1.3
D
¾ cup cake flour
½ tsp baking powder
¼ tsp salt
4 egg yolks
¼ cup sugar
4 egg whites
¼ cup sugar
1 tsp vanilla
3 Tbsp water
1 tsp lemon extract
EP
E
Ingredients










C
O
PY
Cake Roll (Swiss roll)
D
Butter cream filling and frosting
 1 cup butter
 ¾ cup confectioner’s sugar
 ½ cup evap milk
 ½ tsp lemon extract
Procedure:
1. Prepare all ingredients.
2. Mix all dry ingredients in a bowl (flour, baking powder, ¼ cup sugar and salt
aside.
3. Beat egg yolks. Add dry ingredients gradually alternately with water until all
dry ingredients were added.
4. Add Vanilla and lemon extract. Set aside
5. In a separate bowl, beat egg whites until stiff. Add the remaining ¼ cup sugar.
Beat until sugar dissolve.
159
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Procedure for Butter Icing
1. Beat butter until soft and creamy.
2. Alternately add powder sugar and milk.
3. Add lemon extract.
PY
6. Cut and fold the flour mixture with the egg white mixture.
7. Pour in rectangular pan line with wax paper.
8. Bake at 300° F at 10 -15 minutes.
9. If done, sprinkle with confectioner’s sugar and invert.
10. Roll loosely with the help of wax paper or cheese cloth. Allow to cool.
11. Prepare filling/frosting
12. Unroll and fill in with filling.
13. Roll again and place in a half roll pan.
14. Cover and decorate with icing.
15. Place in a half roll box.
Standard Score Sheet for Cake Roll
Excellent
(5)
Very
Good (4)
Good
(3)
Fair
(2)
Poor
(1)
D
Characteristics
C
O
Find out how well you performed by accomplishing
the Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely. Remember
it is our learning that is at stake.
D
EP
E
Outer
1. Shape: Sponge cake-uniform; free
from cracks; Chiffon cake-slightly
rounded top
2. Size: Very lightweight in proportion
size
3. Color: Chiffon cake-uniform golden
brown; Sponge cake-light brown
4. Crust: tender, free from spots or
moist, shiny appearance (sponge);
cracked on surface (chiffon)
Inside
1. Color: Uniform; characteristics of a
kind of cake
2. Grain: Small uniform, thin walled
cells; no large air spaces, or compact
layer; springly crumb
3. Texture: tender; velvety moist; light;
not compact or soggy
4. Flavor: Pleasing, delicate; uniform
SCORE:
Comments:
160
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Enhance your skills in baking a cake. Perform
the activity below by preparing a chiffon cake.
Activity 3.1.4
D
1 ½ cup cake flour
½ cup sugar
1Tbsp baking powder
½ tsp salt
5 egg yolks
6 Tbsp coil
6 -7 Tbsp water
1 tsp lemon/ orange/pineapple extract
1 tsp vanilla
5 egg whites
½ cup sugar
½ tsp cream of tartar
EP
E












C
O
Ingredients
PY
Chiffon Cake
D
Procedure
1. Mix all dry ingredients in a bowl (flour, ½ c sugar, bp, salt).
2. Make a well at the center of dry ingredients.
3. Pour in all the liquid ingredients (Egg yolks, water, oil, vanilla, extract).
4. Blend / mix thoroughly dry and liquid ingredients.
5. Set aside.
6. On a separate bowl, beat egg whites and cream of tartar until stiff. Add ½ c
sugars gradually while beating. Beat until sugar is dissolve.
7. Cut and fold the flour mixture and the egg white mixture until blended.
8. Pour in a prepared baking pan line with parchment paper.
9. Bake at pre-heated oven for 30-45 minutes.
10. Allow to cool.
11. Place on a cake board.
12. Cover with boiled icing.
161
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Boiled icing
4 egg whites
1/2 tsp cream of tartar
2 cup sugar
½ cup water
2 Tbsp syrup
PY





Boil sugar and water and syrup together over low fire to form a threadlike. Gradually
add to beaten egg whites.
C
O
Find out how well you performed by accomplishing
the Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely.
Remember it is our learning that is at stake.
Standard Score Sheet For Chiffon Cakes
Excellent
(5)
D
Characteristics
Very
Good (4)
Good
(3)
Fair
(2)
Poor
(1)
D
EP
E
Outer
1. Shape: Sponge cake-uniform; free
from cracks; Chiffon cake-slightly
rounded top
2. Size: Very lightweight in proportion
size
3. Color: Chiffon cake-uniform golden
brown; Sponge cake-light brown
4. Crust: tender, free from spots or
moist, shiny appearance (sponge);
cracked on surface (chiffon)
Inside
1. Color: Uniform; characteristics of a
kind of cake
2. Grain: Small uniform, thin walled
cells; no large air spaces, or compact
layer; springly crumb
3. Texture: tender; velvety moist; light;
not compact or soggy
4. Flavor: Pleasing, delicate; uniform
SCORE:
Comments:
162
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Enhance your skills in baking a cake.
Perform the activity below by preparing a
chocolate cake.
Activity 3.1.5
D
Ingredients
• ¾ cup all-purpose flour
• 1 ¾ cup brown sugar
• ¼ cup cocoa powder
• 1 ½ tsp baking soda
• 1 tsp salt
C
O
PY
Chocolate Cake
EP
E
Procedure:
1. Combine together and make a well at the center and place the liquid
ingredients.
2. Blend thoroughly.
3. Pour in a prepared round pan 7” or 8” diameter.
4. Bake at 300 °F for 25-30 min.
D
Liquid Ingredients
 1 cup buttermilk (1 tbsp. white vinegar + 1 cup fresh milk)
 ½ cup oil
 3 large eggs or 4 medium eggs
 1 cup brewed coffee (or black coffee) Last to incorporate
Icing



1 cup all-purpose cream
½ cup semisweet chocolate chips
1 tsp instant coffee
Boil all-purpose cream and chocolate until chocolate melt. Add instant coffee.
163
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Find out how well you performed by accomplishing
the Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely.
Remember it is our learning that is at stake.
Standard Score Sheet for Chocolate Cake
Good
(3)
Fair
(2)
Poor
(1)
D
EP
E
D
C
O
Outer
1. Shape: Sponge cake-uniform; free
from cracks; Chiffon cake-slightly
rounded top
2. Size: Very lightweight in proportion
size
3. Color: Chiffon cake-uniform golden
brown; Sponge cake-light brown
4. Crust: tender, free from spots or
moist, shiny appearance (sponge);
cracked on surface (chiffon)
Inside
1. Color: Uniform; characteristics of a
kind of cake
2. Grain: Small uniform, thin walled
cells; no large air spaces, or compact
layer; springly crumb
3. Texture: tender; velvety moist; light;
not compact or soggy
4. Flavor: Pleasing, delicate; uniform
SCORE:
Comments:
Very
Good (4)
PY
Excellent
(5)
Characteristics
164
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
LO2. Prepare and used fillings


PY

Prepare and select fillings in accordance with required consistency and
appropriate flavors.
Fill and assemble slice or layer sponges and cakes according to standard
recipe specifications, enterprise practice and customer preferences.
Select coatings and sidings according to the product characteristics and
required recipe specification.
C
O
What do you need to know?
D
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you can
remember. Find out how much you have learned by doing
Self-check 3.2.1.
EP
E
Lesson Information
Types of fillings, coatings and sidings for cakes and its application
There are many cakes. Cakes with fillings always seem to add a little extra to
the treat. While there is a whole range of cake-fillings recipes to choose from is
important that the type of filling you use is stable enough.
D
Types of Filling
There are many cake filling types that can be used. There are some points
that should be taken into consideration when choosing a filling for a cake. Some of
these points are listed below.



Consider the flavor of the cake and be sure that the filling will complement the
cake's flavor.
Take into account the storage of the cake. Do not select a filling that requires
refrigeration when it will not be possible to refrigerate the cake because of its
size.
If the cake will be exposed to warm temperatures, do not choose a filling that
will melt.
165
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com

If the cake has to be made a day or so ahead of when it will be eaten, be sure
the filling will hold up for that period of time..
The amount of filling will vary depending on the type of filling, the type of cake,
number of layers, and personal preference.
Custard
C
O
PY
Custard filling is a smooth, creamy type filling
similar to pudding. The custard is a cooked filling
containing cornstarch, flour, and egg yolks. Any filling
that contains cornstarch or flour must be brought to a
boil slowly, to prevent scorching and then boiled for at
least a minute to thicken to its fullest. If it is not boiled
long enough, it may thin out when it cools. It can be
flavored with many different ingredients but the most
common are vanilla, lemon, and chocolate. A custard
type filling should not be frozen.
There are many fruits that can be cooked into a
filling for cakes that will provide the cake with an extra
special flavor. Some of the common fruits used are
strawberries, blueberries, raspberries, peaches,
apricots, and rhubarb. When using fruit fillings, a piping
of frosting is applied on top of the layer around the
outer edge of the cake to act as a dam to hold the
filling in between the layers. Fresh fruit can also be
added between the layers but this type of cake should
only be assembled within a few hours of eating it.
The fruit continues to ripen even when refrigerated and
its juices will begin to soak into the cake. If the cake
has a cooked fruit filling that does not contain eggs, it
can be stored at room temperature for up to 2 days.
Refrigerate for longer storage.
D
EP
E
D
Fruit
166
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Frosting
PY
Many times the same frosting used to frost the
cakes is used for the filling between layers. This is a
great way to add flavor and moistness to the cake.
Some of the common frosting types that are also used
as fillings are butter cream, boiled, cream cheese,
whipped cream, and ganache. Cakes with frosting
fillings should be stored according to the type of
frosting being used
Jelly
EP
E
D
C
O
Jelly, jam, or preserved can be used to add an
easy fruit flavored filling to a cake. You can add flavor
to the cake without any additional preparation. When
using jelly filling on a layer cake, use a piping of
frosting around the edge of the layer to keep the jelly,
jam, or preserves confined and then select your
favorite flavor and spread it on the layer inside the
piped frosting. Cakes with this type of filling can be
stored at room temperature for up to 4 days as long as
the frosting can be stored at room temperature. The
filling can be refrigerated if the frosting on the cake
calls for it.
D
Whipped Cream
A filling using whipped cream provides a light
fluffy filling with a delicate flavor. Whipped creams are
sometimes stabilized by adding gelatine to make them
hold up better. A cake with whipped cream filling
should be refrigerated and served the same day that it
is made.
Glazes and Syrups
Glazes and syrups can also be used as fillings but will not provide for a filling
with any thickness. They do provide extra flavor and help seal in the moisture of the
cake. The cake can be stored at room temperature when the filling is a glaze or
syrup unless the cake or frosting requires refrigeration.
167
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
How much did you learn?
Self-Check 3.2.1
Identify what is being described by the sentences below. Write the answer on your
answer sheet.
C
O
PY
1. An icing made of butter and/or shortening blended with confectioner’s sugar
or sugar syrup, other ingredients may also be added.
2. Shiny coating such as syrup, applied to a food; to make a food shiny or
glossy by coating it with a glaze or by browning it under a broiled or in a hot
oven.
3. Rich cream made of chocolate and heavy cream.
4. Edible mixture used to fill pastries, sandwiches, or cakes.
5. Provides a light fluffy filling with a delicate flavour.
EP
E
D
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you can
remember. Find out how much you have learned by doing
Self-check 3.2.2.
Lesson Information
Assembling slice or layer cakes
Steps in assembling simple layer cakes
D
1. Prepare and assemble all tools and equipment.
 Cake
 Spatula
 Filling
 Bread knife
 Toothpick
 Turn table
 Pastry brush
2. Prepare all ingredients and note the proper temperature. Cool cake layers
completely before assembling and icing. Icings and fillings should be spread
out and at the correct temperature.
168
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
3. Trim cake layers, if necessary. Remove any ragged edges. Slightly rounded
tops are easily covered by icing, but excessively large bumps may have to be
cut off.
4. Brush all crumbs from cakes. Loose crumbs make icing difficult.
5. Place the bottom layer upside down (to give a flat surface for the filling) on a
cardboard cake circle of the same diameter. Place the cake at the center of a
cake turn table. If a cake circle or turntable is not available, place the cake on
a serving plate; slip sheets of wax paper or parchment under the edges of the
cake to keep the plate clean.
C
O
PY
6. Spread filling on the bottom layer, out to the edges. If the filling is different
from the outside frosting, be careful not to spread the filling over the edges.
One way to avoid spilling the filling over the edge is to pipe a row of the icing
used for the cake sides around the edge of the cake layer to form a barrier to
hold the filling inside. Use the proper amount of filling. If applied too heavily,
filling will ooze out when top layer is put in place.
7. Place the top layer on the bottom layer, right side up.
EP
E
D
8. Ice the cake .If a thin or light icing is used, pour or spread the icing onto the
center of the cake. Then spread it to the edges and down the sides with a
spatula. If a heavy icing is used, it may be necessary to spread the sides first,
then place a good quantity of icing at the center of the top and push it to the
edges with the spatula.
D
Filling Cake Layers
For a classic round or rectangular cake, you may want to put two levelled cakes
together, joined with your favorite filling. This adds height and drama to your design.
It's easy to do!
169
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Step 1
PY
Fill a decorating bag with medium consistency icing and use tip 12 or use the coupler
without adding a tip. Start with the bottom layer, leveled side up. Create a dam or
circle of icing just inside the edge of the cake. This will prevent any filling from
seeping out when the next layer is added.
C
O
Step 2
D
Fill the center with icing, fruit filling or pudding.
EP
E
Step 3
D
Place the next layer on top, making sure it is level. The weight of the layer will cause
the circle of icing to expand. Place the top layer, leveled side down, so the top of the
cake is perfectly smooth and level.
170
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
How much did you learn?
Self-Check 3.2.2
D
C
O
PY
Arrange the steps in the proper sequence of assembling a layer cake. Write the
correct answer on your answer sheet.
1. Place the bottom layer upside down on a cardboard cake circle of the same
diameter.
2. Have all ingredients prepared and at the proper temperature.
3. Assemble all tools and equipment and have them ready.
4. Trim cake layers, if necessary.
5. Brush all crumbs from cakes.
6. Spread filling on the bottom layer, out to the edges.
7. Place the top layer on the bottom layer, right side up
8. Ice the cake.
EP
E
Enhance your skills in applying filling
for layer cake. Perform the activity
below
Activity 3.2.1
D
Prepare a boiled icing using the given recipe on layered cake. Practice and enhance
your skill on applying filling in a layer cake following the steps on a round Styrofoam.
Try as many times as you can until you perfect the task.
171
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
LO 3. Decorate Cakes

Decorate sponges and cakes suited to the product and occasion and in
accordance with standard recipes and enterprise practices.
Use suitable icings and decorations according to standard recipes and/or
enterprise standards and customers preferences.
What do you need to know?
PY

Icing and Frosting
D
Meaning of Icing
C
O
Read Lesson Information very well then find out how much you
can remember . Find out how much you have learned by doing
Self-Check 3.3.1.
EP
E
Icing is a sweet coating made of sugar, butter, water, and egg whites or milk;
It is often flavored and cooked and used to cover or decorate baked goods, such
as cakes or cookies.
Different Types of Icing
Here are the most popular kinds of cake icing that you can use to finish your cakes.
D
1. Butter Cream
Butter cream is made of sifted powdered sugar, milk and superior butter. The
quality of butter used will reflect on the appearance, consistency and taste of your
butter cream frosting.
Children love this type of frosting and are one of the most common types
used in cake decorating and the secret is whipping up the butter at the right
temperature. Also, since this type of cake icing melts easily in hot weather, the
finished cake must be chilled prior to serving to prevent the butter cream frosting
from losing its stiffness.
172
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
2. Whipped Cream
This type of cake icing is achieved using cold heavy whipping cream and
sugar. Some would advise you to use powdered sugar but ordinary granulated
sugar would work just as well.
You can also add your preferred extract or flavoring to match your cake's
flavor. This is a favorite among those who love a light and easy-to-make frosting
on their cake.
C
O
PY
3. Royal Icing
This type of cake icing dries into a hard outer shell. It is also one of the
easiest to dye with edible colorings. There are two ways to make this type of
frosting: using egg whites (like a meringue icing) and powdered sugar or by using
meringue powder in place of egg whites.
This type of icing is also used to "flood" or color sugar cookies by adding a bit
more water to make it pourable. The baker then uses different cake decorating
tools to draw features on plain biscuits or cookies.
EP
E
D
4. Cream Cheese Frosting
Cream cheese frosting is made with part butter cream frosting and a good
quality cream cheese. This type of frosting is usually perfect for carrot cakes, red
velvet cakes and as a filling for doughnuts and cupcakes because of its
consistency.
It is a bit heavier to spread than most types of cake icing. Some would even
put cream cheese frosting on their bread as a standalone spread!
5. Meringue
The basic ingredients for this frosting are egg whites, cold water and
granulated sugar and are one of the most common types of cake icing. It is light
and fluffy because air is introduced into the egg mixture to create a stiff
consistency.
D
6. Fondant
This is a popular heavy frosting among celebration cakes because it is easy
to sculpt and work out. Basic fondant ingredients include gelatin, glycerine, water,
icing or castor sugar (lighter than powdered sugar) and shortening.
Fondant is made by melting marshmallows (or heating the gelatin mixture)
and adding the rest of the ingredients until you achieve the right consistency,
which ideally, should stretch but should not tear easily. This cake icing is quite
heavy and sculpting it to various shapes is possible with the use of carving and
decorating tools.
173
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
7. Chocolate Ganache
Chocolate ganache and glazing are probably the easiest cake icings to make.
Watch my video tutorial how to prepare chocolate ganache.
How much did you learn?
PY
Self-Check 3.3.1
C
O
Identify the type of icing being described by the sentences below. Write the correct
answer on your answer sheet.
EP
E
D
1. The easiest cake icing to make
2. Frosting is part butter and good quality cheese
3. Type of cake icing that dries into a hard outer shell. It is also one of the
easiest to dye with edible colorings.
4. Made of sifted powdered sugar, milk and superior butter
5. This type of cake icing is achieved using cold heavy whipping cream and
sugar.
Lesson Information
Steps and Procedures in Icing a Cake
You will need:
Cake cardboard
Cake boards come in all different sizes. Use a board that is 1-inch larger
than the cake pan. If you don’t have cake boards, a kitchen plate would be
just fine.
Turntable
It is used to move cake easily in making frosting and decorating.
Cake decorating knife or Icing spatula
These are round tipped blunt knives that are essential for moving icing
around and smoothing edges. They come in bent and flat. I almost
exclusively use a flat, but the bent come in handy for smoothing the top of
cakes.
D



174
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Procedure in icing a cake
1. Start by taping a doily to your cake
board, or kitchen plate. Place on the
revolving cake stand. .
PY
2. Center cake on top of the cake
C
O
board or kitchen plate.
3. Dollop about 3/4 cup of frosting into
EP
E
D
the center of the cake round.
4. Pour about 1/2 cup to 3/4 cup of
D
butterscotch filling into the center of
the iced layer. Using the back of a
spoon, not your icing spatula, spread
the filling until it reaches the icing
barrier that you have created.
175
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
5. Set aside the butterscotch topped
6. Return the butterscotch layer to the
C
O
cake stand and carefully place the
second layer, frosting side down, on
top of the butterscotch filling.
PY
layer for a moment. Place the
second layer of cake on a piece of
waxed paper on the revolving cake
stand, top side up. Trim the cake
with a serrated knife to even out the
cake round just as you did with the
first layer.
7. Make sure that the top of the cake is
D
EP
E
D
fairly even. Gently push the cake
down a bit if one side is higher than
the other. Place a cup of frosting
onto the center of the cake. Using
the icing spatula spread the frosting
out towards the edges of the
cake. Smooth the center letting
frosting accumulate at the edges of
the top of the cake if you find you
have extra. The extra frosting at the
edge of the cake can be used to
frost the sides of the cake.
8. Run the icing spatula under warm
running water. Cleaning the knife
with warm water will help smooth the
icing more easily.
176
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
9. Once the sides have been frosted
and smoothed, clean
spatula once again.
the
icing
PY
Now your cake is ready for decoration. You can cover the cake with
fondant and go nuts.
C
O
Enhance your skills in applying icing on
cake. Perform the activity below.
Activity 3.3.1
D
Prepare a boiled icing using the given recipe above. Using a round Styrofoam,
practice and enhance your skill on icing a cake following the given steps above. Try
as many times as you can until you perfect the task.
EP
E
Find out how well you performed by accomplishing
the Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely.
Remember it is our learning that is at stake.
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
D
4 - Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and adaptability to
problem situations
3 - Can perform the skill satisfactorily without assistance or supervision
2 - Can perform the skill satisfactorily but requires some assistance and/or
supervision
1 - Can perform parts of the skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision
177
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
1
2
3
4
Start by taping a doily to your cake board, or kitchen
plate. Place on the revolving cake stand.
Center cake on top of the cake board or kitchen plate.
Dollop about 3/4 cup of frosting into the center of the cake
round
Pour about 1/2 cup to 3/4 cup of butterscotch filling into the
center of the iced layer.
Set aside the butterscotch topped layer for a moment.
Make sure that the top of the cake is fairly even.
PY
Return the butterscotch layer to the cake stand and carefully
place the second layer, frosting side down, on top of the
butterscotch filling.
LO 4. Present cakes


D

Present cakes in accordance with customer’s expectations and established
standards and procedures.
Select and use equipment in accordance with service requirements.
Maintain product freshness, appearances and eating qualities in accordance
with the established standards and procedures.
Marked cakes or cut portion-controlled to minimize wastage and in
accordance with enterprise specifications and customer preferences.
EP
E

D
C
O
Run the icing spatula under warm running water. Cleaning the
knife with warm water will help smooth the icing more easily.
Once the sides have been frosted and smoothed, clean the
icing spatula once again.
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you can
remember. Find out how much you have learned by doing
Self-check 4.1.
178
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Lesson Information
PRESENTING AND PLATING CAKES
Tips on how to plate and present cakes
It is important to learn how to plate cakes properly. Pastry chefs in
restaurants spend a lot of their time to plate desserts so that they look as good as
they taste.
C
O
PY
1. Be creative with color.
A splash of color can bring your desserts to life. A dark chocolate cake can
go from a brown lump to an artful concoction when garnished with vibrant berries;
a lemon tart goes from a fairly monotone palette to lively and lovely when presented
with the contrast of a violet flower and marbled raspberry coulis.
D
EP
E
D
2. Combine textures.
Adding different textures to the plate adds excitement to the visual appeal of
cake. Different textures excite the senses, giving an anticipatory sense of the taste
pleasures to come.
3. Compose your plate
There are many ways to compose a plate. Consider the plate as if it were a
blank canvas or as if you were composing the frame for photograph. What would fill
the space in an interesting way?
179
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
PY
4. Consider the vessel.
It may seem like common sense, but consider the experience of eating the
dessert when you choose the type of plate.
EP
E
D
C
O
5. Contrast temperatures.
There’s nothing like pairing a slice of perfectly prepared cake with a cool slice
of ice cream. Combining temperatures can be a beautiful thing, but your plating does
require some consideration. Do not put your dessert on a hot plate. A slightly chilled
plate may be helpful when plating cold desserts, whereas room temperature will do
just fine for most cakes or pies.
D
6. Let it be dramatic.
Have a little fun with your cake. Employ tricks to add some magic to the
presentation
.
180
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
7. Don’t make it too tall or wobbly.
A slice of layer cake looks fantastic standing up on a plate. But if it’s too tall,
there’s a strong chance of it toppling over even on a short journey to where it is
being served.
8. Garnish with care.
Keep in mind how the garnish will function on the finished plate.
PY
9. Be consistent.
When plating cakes, be consistent in your design and in serving size. It can
be confusing to see different presentation on each plate, and nobody likes looking
over to the plate across the table and seeing a serving double the size.
C
O
Enhance your skills in presenting and
plating a cake. Perform the activity below.
Activity 3.4.1
EP
E
D
Collect pictures or videos showing different styles of plating and presenting
a dessert. Note down the characteristics/styles that attracts you most and apply it
on your own presentation.
Your output will be rated using the Scoring Rubric below:
SCORE
CRITERIA
Done creatively and neatly showing much relevance to the given topic.
4
Done creatively and neatly enough with relevance to the given topic.
D
5
3
Done creatively and neat enough but no relevance to the given topic.
2
Done simply and neat enough but not so relevant to the given topic.
1
Done poorly with erasures and irrelevant to the given topic.
181
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Lesson Information
Keeping Cakes Fresh and Flavorful
To keep cakes at the peak of their flavor and quality
PY

Store when completely cooled. Cakes with frostings or fillings containing
dairy products should be refrigerated.
Store under cake cover or large bowl. If a cake has a fluffy cooked frosting,
insert a knife handle under an edge of the cake cover so it isn’t airtight. The
frosting can be totally absorbed by the cake when stored in an airtight
container.
C
O

Freeze unfrosted cakes. For unfrosted butter cakes, cool completely, wrap
in heavy-duty foil and freeze. Foam cakes may be frozen in the pan to
prevent crushing. Cover tightly and freeze. Unfrosted cakes may be stored in
the freezer up to 6 months.

Freeze cakes with buttercream frosting. Frosted cakes can be frozen in a
tightly covered plastic container. Or, place cake in freezer until frosting is
frozen. Then wrap tightly in plastic wrap or foil and freeze up to 3 months.
Cooked, boiled or fruit frostings and fillings don’t freeze as well. Place layer
cakes in a box or cake container to prevent crushing, then wrap the box in foil
or plastic wrap before freezing. Foam cakes may be filled or frosted with
whipped cream or whipped topping before freezing. Frosted cakes may be
stored in the freezer up to 3 months.

Thaw cakes at room temperature. Thaw unfrosted cakes covered and
frosted cakes loosely covered for 2 to 3 hours at room temperature.
D
EP
E
D

182
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
LO 5. Store Cakes


Store cakes in accordance with establishment’s standards and
procedures.
Identify storage methods in accordance with product specifications
and established standards and procedures.
Lesson Information
Storing Your Cake
C
O
PY
Read Lesson Information closely then find out
how much you can remember. Find out how much
you have learned by doing Self-check 5.1.
EP
E
D
Factors which can affect the appearance of your decorated cake:
• Sunlight and florescent lighting – will alter icing colors. Keep your cake stored
in a covered box and out of direct sunlight and florescent lighting.
• Humidity – can soften royal icing and gum paste decorations. If you live in a
climate with high humidity, prepare your royal icing using only pure cane
confectioner’s sugar (not beet sugar or dextrose), add less liquid and add 1
more teaspoon Meringue Powder to the recipe.
• Heat – can melt icing and cause decorations to droop. Keep your decorated
cake as cool as possible and stabilize butter cream icing by adding 2
teaspoons Meringue Powder per recipe.
D
Note: Cakes with thoroughly-dried royal icing decorations should be stored
according to the type of icing they are covered with. However, if royal icing
decorations are to be put on a cake that will be frozen, it is recommended that icing
decorations be placed on the cakes after thawing, so that colored decorations won't
bleed from condensation or become soft.
183
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Cake Storage
Plain Butter Cakes,
Single or Multiple
Layered Cakes,
Cake from a Mix
Storage:
Room Temperature
Storage Note:
Angel Food Cake
Storage Note:
Storage:
Room Temperature
Be sure to cover tightly but do not refrigerate. If you do not
have a cake keeper, cover the cake with a large inverted
bowl or store in a large airtight container. Store at room
temperature for approximately 5 days. Freeze for longer
storage, up to 2 months.
Chiffon Cake
Storage Note:
Storage:
Room Temperature
Be sure to cover tightly but do not refrigerate. If you do not
have a cake keeper, cover the cake with a large inverted
bowl or store in a large airtight container. Store at room
temperature for approximately 5 days. Freeze for longer
storage, up to 2 months.
Pound Cake
Storage:
Room Temperature
Storage Note:
Be sure to cover tightly but do not refrigerate. Wrap airtight
in plastic wrap or in foil unless the recipe indicates
differently. Store at room temperature for approximately 5
days. Freeze for longer storage, up to 3 months.
EP
E
D
C
O
PY
Be sure to cover tightly but do not refrigerate. If you do not
have a cake keeper, cover the cake with a large inverted
bowl, cover it with foil, or store in a large airtight container.
Store at room temperature for approximately 5
days. Freeze for longer storage, up to 3 months.
D
Sponge Cake
Storage:
Room Temperature
Storage Note:
Be sure to cover tightly but do not refrigerate. If you do not
have a cake keeper, cover the cake with a large inverted
bowl or store in a large airtight container. Store at room
temperature for approximately 1 week. Freeze for longer
storage, up to 2 months.
Note: The information above pertains to cakes that are unfrosted and without any
type of filling. Avoid storing a cake in the refrigerator whenever possible because
refrigeration causes the cake to dry out faster and can affect its flavor. When
adding frosting or a filling, the cake may require refrigeration if they contain
perishable ingredients, such as fresh fruit, whipped cream, meringue type topping,
eggs, or custard.
184
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Frosting / Topping Storage
Boiled Icing
Storage:
Room Temperature
Storage Note:
Be sure to cover tightly but do not refrigerate. If it is not
stored airtight, it will begin to set. Once a cake has been
frosted with boiled icing it can be stored at room
temperature. Freezing is not recommended.
Buttercream
Frosting
Storage Note:
Buttercream can be stored, refrigerated, in an airtight
container for up to 2 weeks before using. Remove it from
the refrigerator at least an hour before using so it will
warm to room temperature. It can also be frozen for
extended storage. A decorated cake with buttercream
frosting can be stored at room temperature for up to 3
days. If you want to refrigerate a decorated cake, place it
in the refrigerator unwrapped until the frosting hardens
slightly. It can then be loosely covered with plastic.
Buttercream frosting can be frozen.
C
O
D
Storage Note:
Cream cheese frosting can be stored in the refrigerator for
up to 2 weeks before using. Cakes frosted with cream
cheese frosting must be stored in the refrigerator. The
frosting will firm up when chilled but will soften quickly
when it sits at room temperature. Cream cheese frosting
can be frozen.
EP
E
Cream Cheese
Frosting
Storage:
Refrigerated
PY
Storage:
Room Temperature
D
Dusting
Storage:
Room Temperature
Storage Note:
Many dusting ingredients are shelf stable items that
should be stored accordingly. When applied to the cake,
storage time should be followed as to what is appropriate
for the type of cake. When using powdered sugar for
dusting, it is a good idea to wait to dust the cake just
before serving because the cake can absorb the sugar,
especially if it is a moist cake.
Fondant
Storage:
Room Temperature
Storage Note:
Unused fondant can be stored in an airtight container for
up to 2 months at room temperature in a cool, dry area.
Do not refrigerate or freeze. Store cakes decorated with
fondant for up to 3 days at room temperature.
Fresh Fruit Topping
Storage:
Refrigerated
Storage Note:
Fresh fruit can also be added as a topping to the cake. A
cake with fresh fruit topping should only be assembled
within a few hours of eating it. The fruit continues to ripen
even when refrigerated and its juices will begin to soak
into the cake. If the cake has a cooked fruit topping that
185
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
does not contain eggs, it can be stored at room
temperature for up to 2 days. Refrigerate for longer
storage. If the cake is going to be frozen, it is best to wait
until the cake is thawed and then add the fresh fruit
topping just before it is going to be served.
Storage Note:
Ganache can be stored at room temperature for up to 2
days before using. If storing, be sure to cover the entire
surface of the ganache. Cover with plastic wrap. Press it
down so that it is covering the entire surface completely.
The ganache will need to be warmed again before using.
A cake covered with ganache should be stored at room
temperature. If it is exposed to warm temperatures, it will
begin to soften. A cake topped with ganache can be
frozen but it may lose some of its sheen when thawed.
Glaze and Syrup
Storage:
Room Temperature
Storage Note:
If a glaze will set at room temperature for a while before
being used, it should be kept loosely covered and if it
begins to thicken set it in a pan of warm water to help
loosen. A glaze can be frozen but its sheen will not be the
same and it will need to be reheated. A cake with a glaze
or syrup coating should not have to be refrigerated unless
the cake has a filling that requires refrigeration. Allow the
glaze to cool and harden completely before covering the
cake for storing.
C
O
D
Storage Note:
Unused paste can be stored in an airtight container, not
refrigerated, for up to 2 months but be sure the container
is closed tight so it does not harden. Do not freeze.
Decorated cake can be stored at room temperature for up
to 3 days. The gum paste will hold up fairly well on warm
days but extreme heat will start to soften the paste.
EP
E
Gum Paste - Sugar
Paste
Storage:
Room Temperature
PY
Ganache
Storage:
Room Temperature
D
Meringue-Style
Frosting
Storage:
Refrigerated
Royal Icing
Storage:
Room Temperature
Storage Note:
It does not store well as it deflates easily. It is
recommended to prepare close to when it is to be used. If
storing, it needs to be refrigerated.
Storage Note:
Royal icing has a tendency to dry fairly quickly so it is
important to take precautions while using it so it does not
dry out before you are finished. It can be stored up to 3
days at room temperature. Be sure to cover the bowl with
a damp cloth and then plastic to prevent it from drying out.
186
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
The icing may separate slightly but a good stirring will
bring it back to a smooth texture. The royal icing on a
cake does not require refrigeration. If the cake needs to
be covered, the royal icing will be hard so you do not have
to worry about disrupting the decorations.
Filling Storage
Storage Note:
Storage:
Refrigerated
The custard filling can be stored in the refrigerator for up
to 3 days but is best when used the day it is made. A
custard type filling should not be frozen.
Fresh Fruit Filling
Storage:
Refrigerated
Storage Note:
Fresh fruit can also be added in between the layers of
the cake but this type of cake should only be assembled
within a few hours of eating it. The fruit continues to
ripen even when refrigerated and its juices will begin to
soak into the cake. If the cake has a cooked fruit filling
that does not contain eggs, it can be stored at room
temperature for up to 2 days. Refrigerate for longer
storage. It is recommended to not freeze a cake with a
fresh fruit filling because the fruit may become watering
when thawed.
C
O
D
Storage Note:
Cakes with frosting fillings should be stored according to
the type of frosting being used.
EP
E
Frosting
Storage:
Room Temperature /
Refrigerated
PY
Custard Filling
Storage Note:
Storage:
Room Temperature
Cakes with this type of filling can be stored at room
temperature for up to 4 days as long as the frosting can
be stored at room temperature; after 4 days the jelly will
have a tendency to start to mould. The filling can be
refrigerated if the frosting on the cake calls for it.
D
Jelly Fillings
Whipped Cream
Storage:
Refrigerated
Storage Note:
A cake with whipped cream filling should be refrigerated
and served the same day that it is made.
Glazes and Syrups
Storage Note:
Storage:
Room Temperature
The cake can be stored at room temperature when the
filling is a glaze or syrup unless the cake or frosting
requires refrigeration.
187
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
How to Wrap, Store, and Keep Cake Fresh
Unfrosted and Un-Cut Cake- Wrap these tightly in plastic, top, sides, and bottoms,
so the plastic is touching the sides of the cake (that is to say, don't just drape the
plastic over the top). Second to this, go for a plastic bag with a "zip-lock" type seal.
Store these wrapped cakes on the counter at room temperature, and they will keep
for about a week before starting to stale. Oil-based cakes tend to keep a day or two
longer than butter-based ones.
To keep cakes for longer than a week, try freezing them.
PY
• Frosted and Un-Cut Cake–Frosting acts as plastic wrapper where cakes are
protected from air moisture. Frosted cake can be kept at room temperature for 4-5
days. It should be covered with a cake keeper or an overturned bowl to protect it
from dust, pet hair, and other things in the air.
C
O
• Cut Cake, Frosted or Unfrosted–When you cut a cake, moisture begins to escape
and cause the cake stale more quickly. To avoid moisture loss, cover the sliced
edges with more frosting or press a piece of plastic wrap directly unto the sliced side
and make sure it sticks. Cut cake keeps for a little less time, about 3-4 days.
EP
E
D
• When to Refrigerate Cakes - Cakes frosted and unfrosted, cut and un-cut, are
perfectly fine at room temperature for several days. Refrigeration is only necessary if
your apartment gets very hot during the day (As Parks says, "High moisture + high
sugar + high temp = bacteria feeding frenzy") or if you're making a cake that won't be
served for more than three days, like when baking cake ahead for a party or special
occasion.
D
To refrigerate, wrap unfrosted cakes in plastic to protect it from absorbing any weird
fridge smells and to protect it from drying out, and then unwrap it to warm up on the
counter before serving. For frosted cakes, chill the cake uncovered for fifteen
minutes to harden the icing, and then wrap it in plastic wrap.
188
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
How much did you learn?
Self-Check 3.5.1
Complete the table below. List down the items that need to be refrigerated and those
that can be kept in room temperature. Choose the answer from the choices given
below. Write your answer on your answer sheet.
C
O
Keep at room temperature
EP
E
D
Needs to be refrigerated
Whipped Cream
Jelly Fillings
Gum Paste - Sugar Paste
PY
Glazes and Syrups
Royal Icing
Fresh Fruit Filling
Custard Filling
Activity 3.5.1
D
Your father Sherwin will be celebrating his 50thbirthday. You will bake a
special cake for him using chosen flavor of your choice. Applying what you have
learned in your baking class. Consider this cake your very own recipe and your very
own design. You will also think a name for your cake. Your mother Annie who is an
expert in baking will be observing you all along to know if you are using the right
tools and are doing the right procedures. The rubric below will be the guide in rating
your performance and product.
189
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Standard Score Sheet for Cake
Good
(3)
Fair
(2)
Poor
(1)
D
EP
E
D
C
O
Outer
1. Shape: Sponge cake-uniform; free
from cracks; Chiffon cake-slightly
rounded top
2. Size: Very lightweight in proportion
size
3. Color: Chiffon cake-uniform golden
brown; Sponge cake-light brown
4. Crust: tender, free from spots or
moist, shiny appearance (sponge);
cracked on surface (chiffon)
Inside
1. Color: Uniform; characteristics of a
kind of cake
2. Grain: Small uniform, thin walled
cells; no large air spaces, or compact
layer; springly crumb
3. Texture: tender; velvety moist; light;
not compact or soggy
4. Flavor: Pleasing, delicate; uniform
SCORE:
Comments:
Very
Good (4)
PY
Excellent
(5)
Characteristics
190
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
How much have you learned?
Post-assessment
Read and analyze the statements carefully. Choose the best answer and write the
letter in your answer sheet.
C
O
PY
1. What basic ingredient in baking helps in attaining baked products tenderness?
A. leavening
B. liquid
C. shortening
D. sugar
2. Which refers to heating the oven to attain the required baking temperature
before baking?
A. baking
B. broiling
C. pre-heating
D. proofing
EP
E
D
3. What type of cake contains a high percentage of fat or shortening?
A. butter type cake
B. chiffon
C. foam type cake
D. unshortened cake
D
4. Which is a combination of shortened cake and foam type cake?
A. butter type cake
B. chiffon
C. foam type cake
D. unshortened cake
5. Which is also known as unshortened cake which contains less than 5% fats?
A. butter type cake
B. chiffon
C. foam type cake
D. shortened cake
6. Which is a coating that makes food shiny or glossy?
A. custard
B. ganache
C. glaze
D. syrup
191
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
7. It is an icing, made of butter and/or shortening and blended with confectioner’s
sugar or sugar syrup.
A. butter cream
B. custard
C. ganache
D. syrup
8. It is a rich cream mixture made out of chocolate and heavy cream.
A. butter cream
B. custard
C. ganache
D. syrup
C
O
PY
9. What edible mixture is used to fill pastries, sandwiches, or cakes?
A. butter cream
B. custard
C. ganache
D. syrup
D
10. What type of icing is made out of boiled sugar syrup that is agitated so that it
would crystallize into a mass of extremely small white crystals?
A. butter cream
B. custard
C. filling
D. fondant
EP
E
11. Custard filling can be stored in the refrigerator for up to how many days?
A. 3 days
B. 4 days
C. 5 days
D. 6 days
D
12. It refers to dry-heat cooking that is usually done in an oven.
A. baking
B. broiling
C. grilling
D. stewing
13. Which is fine white flour made from soft wheat which contains 7-9% protein?
A. all-purpose flour
B. bread flour
C. cake flour
D. pastry flour
14. Which is a light cake made of meringue and flour?
A. angel food cake
B. butter cake
C. chiffon cake
D. sponge cake
192
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
15.
Which refers to getting the right number of servings from a recipe and serving
the right amount?
A. mark-up
B. portion control
C. weight
D. yield
16.
Which refers to method of dividing cake into uniform pieces before serving?
A. counting
B. cutting
C. measuring
D. weighing
C
O
PY
17. What method of portioning is done with the use of food scale?
A. counting
B. cutting
C. measuring
D. weighing
Which is a very fine sugar which dissolves faster and is perfect for making
meringue?
A. caster sugar
B. confectioner’s sugar
C. granulated sugar
D. white sugar
EP
E
19.
D
18. Which is a sweet soluble organic compound that belongs to the carbohydrate
group of food?
A. flour
B. milk
C. shortening
D. sugar
D
20. What granulated sugar is pulverized into powder to prevent caking?
A. caster sugar
B. confectioner’s sugar
C. granulated sugar
D. white sugar
193
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
GENERALIZATION:
D
EP
E
D
C
O
PY
This module gave the learner’s the opportunity to
develop their skills in preparing, decorating and presenting
gateau, tortes, and cakes according to the standard
operating procedures and techniques. This prepares them
for the next set of skills: the preparation and displaying
petit fours and presenting desserts.
194
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Overview
C
O
PY
Quarter 4
D
EP
E
D
The term “petit fours” refers to confections such as
miniature cookies, tartlets, and cakes that may accompany
an afternoon coffee or tea or that are served after a meal.
Petit fours are light, delicate, crisp, and refreshing. The
common defining characteristic of petit fours is that they
can be eaten in one or two bites. Petit fours, which means
small ovens in French, refers to the tradition of baking
small pastries in a slow oven after large pastries have
been removed and oven temperature is reduced.
195
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Definition of Technical Terms
substance having a sour or sharp flavor
Angel food cake
a type of cake made of meringue and flour
Appropriate
suitable or proper under the given circumstances
Assembling
fitting together the component parts of a certain dish or
food.
Bake
to cook food in a dry heat method inside an oven.
Batter
is a semi-liquid mixture of one or more flours combined
with liquids such as water, milk or eggs and is used to
prepare various foods
Beating
introducing air into the mixture through mechanical
agitation as in beating eggs
Blend
to combine ingredients and produce a homogenous
mixture
D
a sugar and egg white icing for cakes; Sugar is first
cooked on the stovetop to form syrup and then the hot
syrup is beaten into whipped egg whites. As the
mixture is beaten it becomes smooth, fluffy, and glossy
EP
E
Boiled icing
C
O
PY
Acid
Italian meringue used as cake icing
Brown sugar
regular granulated sucrose containing
impurities that give distinctive flavor
Cake flour
fine, white flour made from soft wheat
Caramelized petit four
also known as Petit four sec which is usually unfilled
cookies; These have a signature dry, crisp texture from
being baked at a lower temperature for longer periods
of time.
Chemical leavener
leavening agent that releases gasses produced by
chemical reaction (e.g. baking soda, baking powder,
baking ammonia).
Chiffon cake
a light cake made using the chiffon method
Chiffon Method
cake mixing method involving cutting and folding
D
Boiled icing
196
various
-
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Choux pastry or pâte à choux
a light pastry dough for making cream puff and
éclairs.
a dry powder from pulverized cocoa solids
Cocoa butter
white or yellowish fat found in natural chocolate
Commis
a junior chef
Confectioner’s sugar
sucrose ground in to fine powder and mixed with a little
cornstarch to prevent caking
Consistency
the way in which a certain substance, typically liquid,
holds together; thickness or viscosity
Creaming
rubbing butter and sugar until it becomes light and
fluffy
Creaming method -
mixing method that begins with the blending of fat and
sugar; used for cakes, cookies and similar items
Dark chocolate
sweetened chocolate that consist of chocolate liquor
and sugar
Dust
to sprinkle the surface with flour to avoid mixture to
stick on it
D
C
O
PY
Cocoa powder
quantity of material that fills or is used to fill something,
or is used to coat, or is used to design the top of food
EP
E
Filling, coating, topping
continuously beat egg white to incorporate air until it
becomes light and fluffy
Fondant
type of icing made of boiled sugar syrup that is agitated
to crystallize into a mass of extremely small white
crystals
D
Foaming
Frost
to cover cakes with icing
Garnishing
to decorate or embellish something, especially food
Gateau
French word for cake
Genoise
sponge cake made by whipping whole eggs with sugar
and folding in flour and sometimes, melted butter
Glaze
an overlay or cover with a smooth and shiny coating or
finish
197
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
sucrose in a fine crystalline form
Grease
to brush pan with shortening
Gum paste
type of sugar paste/pastillage made from vegetable gum
Iced petit four
iced or decorated tiny cakes covered in fondant or icing
Marzipan
a paste or confection, icing or filling made of meringue
and gelatin or other stabilizers
Marzipan petit four
a paste made of almonds and sugar that is worked to a
plastic consistency. Its texture allows it to be rolled out
with a rolling pin like dough or modeled into shapes of
fruits
Petit Four
miniature bite-size confections which comes from the
French word petit which means small or little and four
which means oven.
Preheat
to heat the oven prior to baking to achieve the required
temperature
Product
an article or substance that is manufactured or refined
for sale
C
O
D
to remove sticky ingredients from the side of the mixing
bowl
EP
E
Scrape
to pass the flour through a sieve to make it finer and
light
Sponge
batter or dough of yeast, flour and water that is allowed
to ferment and is then mixed with more flour and other
ingredients to make bread dough
D
Sift
PY
Granulated sugar
Sponge cake
unshortened cake made by whipping eggs and sugar
to a foam and folding in flour
Sweet paste
A sweet doughy candy or confection
Tortes
German for various types of cakes, usually layer cakes
Turntable
pedestal with a flat, rotating top used for holding cakes
while they are being decorated
Whip
to beat rapidly and continuously to aid incorporation of
air as in whipping egg whites to make meringue and in
cream
198
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
How much do you know?
Pre-assessment
PY
Take this test to determine how much you already know about
preparing and displaying petit fours.
Read and analyze the statement carefully. Choose the best answer and write the
letter only on your answer sheet.
C
O
1. It refers to miniature bite-sized confections coated with icing.
A. fresh petit four
B. iced petit four
C. marzipan
D. petit four
EP
E
D
2. It refers to a petit four decorated/covered with fondant icing.
A. fresh petit four
B. iced petit four
C. marzipan
D. petit four
3. It is a tiny fresh fruit tartlet.
A. fresh petit four
B. iced petit four
C. marzipan
D. petit four
D
4. Which is a paste or confection, icing, or filling made of meringue and gelatin?
A. fresh petit four
B. iced petit four
C. marzipan
D. petit four
5. Which paste is made of almonds and sugar that is worked to plastic consistency?
A. fresh petit four
B. iced petit four
C. marzipan petit four
D. petit four
199
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
6. Which petit four filling enhances flavor, adds moisture, and binds the product?
A. butter
B. ganache
C. jams
D. meringue
8. Which is a final component of plated dessert?
A. crunch
B. garnish
C. main item
D. sauce
PY
7. Which mixture of chocolate and cream is used as filing for iced petit four?
A. butter
B. ganache
C. jams
D. meringue
C
O
9. What dessert component is the actual dessert itself?
A. crunch
B. garnish
C. main item
D. sauce
EP
E
D
10. Which component contributes to the moistness of the dessert?
A. crunch
B. garnish
C. main item
D. sauce
D
11. Which are added components of dessert that are essential for soft desserts like
custard and ice cream?
A. crunch
B. garnish
C. main item
D. sauce
12. It refers to ensuring that the right quantity of food is prepared and served to
customers.
A. markup
B. portion control
C. standard size
D. yield
200
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
13. It is an icing made of butter and or shortening, blended with confectioner’s
sugar or sugar syrup.
A. butter cream
B. custard
C. ganache
D. syrup
PY
14. Which is a rich cream made of chocolate and heavy cream?
A. butter cream
B. custard
C. ganache
D. syrup
C
O
15. Which is an edible mixture used to fill pastries, sandwiches, or cakes?
A. butter cream
B. custard
C. filling
D. ganache
D
16. It is a type of icing made of boiled sugar syrup that is agitated to crystallize it
into a mass of extremely small white crystals.
A. butter cream
B. custard
C. filling
D. fondant
EP
E
17. For how many days can a custard filling be refrigerated?
A. 3 days
B. 4 days
C. 5 days
D. 6 days
D
18. Which refer to dry heat cooking that is often done with an oven?
A. baking
B. broiling
C. grilling
D. stewing
19. Which fine white flour is made from soft wheat that contains 79% protein?
A. all-purpose flour
B. bread flour
C. cake flour
D. pastry flour
20. What light cake is made of meringue and flour?
A. angel food cake
B. batter cake
C. chiffon cake
D. sponge cake
201
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Lesson 4: PREPARE AND DISPLAY PETIT FOUR
EXPECTED OUTCOMES:
LO 1. Prepare iced petit four

D


Prepare, cut and assemble sponges and bases according to standard
recipes and enterprise requirements and practices
Prepare fillings with the required flavors and consistency
Prepare fondant icing following required temperature and standard
procedure
Design and use decorations in accordance with establishment standards
and procedures
EP
E

C
O
LO1. prepare iced petit four
LO2. prepare fresh petit four
LO3. prepare marzipan petit four
LO4. prepare caramelized petit four
LO5. display petit four
LO6. Store petit four
PY
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to
D
What do you need to know?
Read Lesson Information carefully closely then find out how much
you can remember. Find out how much you have learned by
performing Activity 4.1.1 and 4.1.2.
202
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Lesson Information
Petit Fours refer to:
 Small biscuits and cakes tastefully decorated
 Sweetmeat and cakes designed to be served as dessert with after dinner
coffee or cocktails.
PY
Petit Fours should be small. They are often made into different shapes. They
are delicate, crisp, fresh, attractive, light, and designed to be swallowed in just one or
two mouthfuls.
EP
E
D
Iced petit four
C
O
It is prepared from a variety of ingredients. They are usually small pieces that
have been baked. While the emphasis is on small, non-baked confectionery items
like caramelized and glace fruits, marzipan shapes, or other small sweet delicacies
are also served as Petit Fours.
D
Iced petit four are small, bite-sized cakes with a thin coating of glaze,
typically fondant, which is applied at the end of the production process. Assembled in
large sheets and cut after setting up, petit fours glaze contain thin layers of cake
alternating with jam and/or butter cream. The top of the cake is adorned with a thin
layer of marzipan to add flavor, as well as a smooth surface for the glaze to settle on.
Marzipan is made from almond paste, a cooked sugar syrup, and sometimes glucose
and/or egg white. After the cake is cut, it can be enrobed in fondant, or sometimes
dipped in chocolate. Petit fours glazes are typically finished with intricate, stylized
piping.
Types or kinds of petit four bases:
The base for petit four can be marzipan and sponge. A petit four base must
be strong enough to hold the petit fours.

Cake can be baked in shallow trays then topped with soft topping then cut to
shape desired similar to sponge sheets
203
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com



Shortbread mixture of flour, fat and sugar, enriched with egg and has a
short eating quality
Pastry puff pastry can make a suitable base for petit fours when a sweet
filling is used.
Sponge baked in thin sheets and layered together with filling which act as an
adhesive to hold the sheets of sponge together.
.
C
O
Activity 4.1.1
PY
Enhance your skills in assembling and cutting
iced petit four bases by performing this activity.
Assembling and cutting iced petit four base
Things needed
Sponge sheets (56 mm thick or 3 cm total height when assembled)

Jam strawberry, mango, etc. ( smooth texture )

2 sheets of wax paper
Procedure:
D

EP
E
1. Lay the first sponge cake on a wax paper.
2. Spread a thin layer of jam over the cake.
3. Place a second sheet cake on top of the first layer.
4. Press firmly.
5. Remove loose crumbs.
D
6. Spread a second layer jam thinly over the cake.
7. Take a third sheet of cake. Turn it over to put the bottom part on top.
8. Press sheets of sponge firmly together.
9. Place tray on top to allow layered cake and jam to bond.
Cut bases to the desired shape

Any form and shape can be applied but accuracy of cutting is vital. It should
minimize waste.

Shapes can be round, diagonal, square, or triangle.

Almost 20% of the product is wasted if round and diagonal shaped is use.
204
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Find out how well you performed by accomplishing
the Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely.
Remember it is our learning that is at stake.
C
O
PY
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
4 – Advanced. Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
3 – Proficient. Can perform this skill satisfactorily without assistance or
supervision.
2 – Approaching to Proficiency. Can perform this skill satisfactorily but requires
some assistance and/or supervision.
1 – Basic. Can perform parts of this skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision.
Check the appropriate box that corresponds to your level of performance in doing
each of the given task s using the Scoring Rubric above.
PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
1
2
3
4
Laid the first sponge cake on a wax paper.
D
Spread a thin layer of jam over the cake.
EP
E
Placed a second sheet cake on top of the first layer.
Pressed firmly.
Removed loose crumbs.
Spread a second layer jam thinly over the cake.
D
Took a third sheet of cake and turned it over to put the bottom
part on top.
Pressed sheets of sponge firmly together.
Placed tray on top to allow layered cake and jam to bond.
205
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Enhance your skills in baking and preparing iced
petit four bases by performing this activity.
Activity 4.1.2
EP
E
D
Ingredients
 ¼ cup butter, softened
 ¼ cup shortening
 1 cup sugar
 1 tsp vanilla
 1 ⅓ cup All-purpose Flour
 2 tsp baking powder
 ½ tsp salt
 ⅔ cup milk
 3 egg whites
C
O
PY
Pretty Petit Fours (Iced)
D
Glaze
 2 lbs confectioner’s sugar
 ⅔ cup plus 2 tbsp. water
 2 tsp orange extract
Frosting
 6 tbsp. butter, softened
 2 tbsp. shortening
 ½ tsp vanilla extract
 3 cups confectioner’s sugar
 3 to 4 tbsp. milk
 Gel, liquid or paste food coloring
206
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
C
O
PY
Procedure:
1. In a large bowl, cream the butter, shortening and sugar until light and fluffy.
Beat in vanilla. Combine the flour, baking powder and salt; add to creamed
mixture alternately with milk, beating well after each addition. In a small bowl,
beat egg whites until soft peaks form; gently fold into batter.
2. Pour into a greased 9in. square baking pan. Bake at 350°F for 20-25 minutes
or until a toothpick inserted near the center comes out clean. Cool for 10
minutes before removing from pan to a wire rack to cool completely.
3. Cut a thin slice off each side of the cake. Cut into 1 ¼ inch square.
4. In a large bowl, combine glaze ingredients. Beat on low speed just until
blended; beat on high until smooth. Apply glaze evenly over tops and sides of
cake squares, allowing excess to drip off. Let dry. Repeat if necessary to
thoroughly coat squares. Let dry completely.
5. For frosting, cream the butter, shortening and vanilla in a small bowl. Beat in
confectioner’s sugar and enough milk to achieve desired consistency. Place
½ cup each in two bowls; tint one pink and one green.
6. Cut a small hole in the corner of a pastry or plastic bag; insert #104 tip. Fill
with pink frosting pipe a rosebud on each petit four. Insert #3 round tip into
another pastry or plastic bag; fill with green frosting. Pipe a leaf under each
rose. Yield: 2½ dozen (3 cups frosting).
EP
E
D
Total Time: Prep: 40 min. Bake: 20 min. + cooling
Makes: 30 servings
D
Find out how well did you performed by
accomplishing the Scoring Rubric honestly and
sincerely. Remember it is your learning at stake.
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
4 – Advanced. Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
3 – Proficient. Can perform this skill satisfactorily without assistance or
supervision.
2 -Approaching to Proficiency. Can perform this skill satisfactorily
but requires some assistance and/or supervision.
1 – Basic. Can perform parts of this skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision.
207
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Check the appropriate box that corresponds to your level of performance by doing
each of the given tasks using the Scoring Rubric above.
PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
1
2
3
4
Butter, shortening and sugar are creamed in bowl until light and
fluffy.
Poured and baked at 350°For 2025 minutes.
Cake was thinly slice and were cut into 1 ¼ inch square.
C
O
PY
Glaze ingredients were combined and beat on low speed just
until blended and smooth.
Butter, shortening and vanilla were creamed well . Beat in
confectioner’s sugar and enough milk to achieve desired
consistency.
Cut a small hole in the corner of a pastry or plastic bag; inserted
#104 tip. Filled with pink frosting; piped a rosebud on each petit
four.
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you can
remember. Find out how much you have learned by performing
Activity 4.1.3.
EP
E
D
Lesson Information
Filling and flavor for iced petit four
 Jams are high in moisture is used to enhance flavor, add moisture, and to
bind the product. Blend jam until a smooth consistency is attained, making
sure no lumps are present, as they will tear sponge cake.
Ganache is a mixture of chocolate and cream. Ganache carry alcohol flavors
well to add interest to the petit fours. When ganache is agitated it must be
worked quickly as it will set.
D


Butter creams need to be chilled before cutting. Butter creams are flexible
for decorating the tops of petit fours as they can be flavored and easily piped.
However, they can be easily damaged at room temperature.
208
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Enhance your skills in on preparing fondant icing
by performing the following activity.
Activity 4.1.3
Directions
D
Dissolve unflavored gelatin to ¼ cup of water.
Put to low heat and mix ½ cup glucose.
When the glucose is melted, mix 2 tbsp. shortening and 1 tbsp glycerin.
Stir and remove from heat as soon as shortening and glycerin is mixed.
ln a separate bowl, mix 5 cups confectioner’s sugar and 2 tsp tylose.
Pour the glucose mixture in the confectioners and tylose mixture and mix well
to form dough-like consistency.
7. Knead the fondant into desired form of shape.
EP
E
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
unflavored gelatin
glucose
water
shortening
confectioners ‘sugar
glycerin
tylose
C
O
Ingredients
 1 tbsp
 1/2 cup
 ¼ cup
 2tbsp.
 5 cups
 1 tbsp
 2 tsp
PY
Fondant Icing
D
Find out how well you performed by accomplishing
the Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely.Remember
it is your learning at stake.
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
4 – Advanced. Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
3 – Proficient. Can perform this skill satisfactorily without assistance or
supervision.
2 -- Approaching to Proficiency. Can perform this skill satisfactorily but requires
some assistance and/or supervision.
1 – Basic. Can perform parts of this skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision.
209
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Using the Scoring Rubric above, check the appropriate box that corresponds to your
level of performance in doing each of the given task.
PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
1
2
3
4
Dissolved unflavored gelatin to ¼ cup of water.
Put to low heat then mixed ½ cup glucose.
When the glucose was melted, mixed 2 tbsp. shortening and 1
tbsp. glycerin.
Stirred and removed from heat as soon as shortening and
glycerin was mixed.
PY
ln a separate bowl, mixed 5 cups confectioner’s sugar and 2 tsp
tylose.
Poured the glucose mixture in the confectioners and tylose
mixture and mixed well to form dough like consistency.
C
O
Kneaded the fondant into desired form of shape.
D
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you can
remember.
EP
E
Lesson Information
Design and display iced petit four
D
It is important to design, decorate, and display petit fours to:
 Make them more attractive and appetizing
 enhance presentation, and
 visual and textural diversity.
Sample petit four design
210
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Summary
Prepare bases
• Production of the bases is the easy part.
• Sheet bases need to be thin and even across all the area.
• Avoid lumps and bumps.
• Bases made out of any dry pastry cake or sponge.
PY
Cut to shape
• Any shape can be used but wastage needs to be added to the cost of
production.
• It is best to use straight lines.
• Cut small.
C
O
Glazing
• Do not prepare glaze too far ahead or it may lose shine, gloss, heat.
• The preparation will need to be done again.
• Product must be dry.
• Plenty of workspace is required.
EP
E
D
Decorate to enhance appeal
• Plan the decoration.
• Avoid very big decorations.
• Complement the petit fours.
Display
• Use consistent shape.
• Use consistent configuration.
• Alternating height and profiles.
D
LO 2. Prepare fresh petit four




Bake and decorate a selection of small choux paste shapes in accordance
with established standards and procedures.
Prepare and blend baked sweet paste in accordance with establishment
standards and procedures.
Prepare and use fillings the required flavors and correct consistency.
Use garnishes, glazes and finished in accordance with established standards
and procedures.
211
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
What do you need to know?
PY
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you can
remember. Find out how much you have learned by performing
Activity 4. 2.1
EP
E
D
Fresh petit four
C
O
Lesson Information
D
Fresh petit fours also called petit fours fraise or fresh are moist, filled with
pastry cream and often topped with fresh fruits miniature éclairs, and cream puff.
This type of petit four is created with mini pastries. The most common types
of mini pastries are fruit tarts, éclairs or cream puffs. Cream puffs and éclairs are
filled with butter cream or pastry cream, while fruit tarts are made with custard and
fresh fruits on top. Some fresh petit fours are made with marzipan and look like
truffles. Fresh petit fours are not typically glazed, but some éclairs and cream puffs
have a chocolate glaze placed on top to finish them off.
212
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Enhance your skills in preparing fresh petit
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
fours by performing the following activity.
Activity 4.2.1
Cream Puff or Éclair
60 ml milk
60 ml water
¼ butter, cut into cubes
1 Tbsp sugar
2-3 eggs
120 g All-purpose flour
PY
Paste






EP
E
D
C
O
Procedure:
1. Bring the first four ingredients: milk, water, Butter and sugar to boil.
2. Add all-purpose flour.
3. Remove from heat if desired consistency is attained.
4. When paste is already cooled, add the egg one at a time. Mix thoroughly.
5. Place the paste in the pastry bag and form the cream puff and éclair.
6. Bake at 4000 F for 20 minutes or until paste is puff then lower the temperature,
to 300 0F. Continue baking for 20 minutes or until brown. Set aside.
7. Assemble filling for cream puff and éclair.
8. Top with powder sugar for cream puff and with ganache for éclair.
D
Prepare Filling:
 270 ml fresh milk
 ½ tsp
vanilla
 1
egg
 50 g
sugar
 15 g
all-purpose flour
 10 g
cornstarch
 1 tsp
brandy
Mix and cook over low fire stirring constantly until proper consistency is attained.
Allow to cool.
Ganache
 100 grams
chocolate bar
 1 tsp
butter
 24 Tbsp
all-purpose cream
Melt together all ingredients over low fire.
213
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Find out how well you performed by accomplishing
the Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely.
Remember it is your learning which is at stake.
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
4 – Advanced. Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
PY
3 – Proficient. Can perform this skill satisfactorily without assistance or
supervision.
2 – Approaching to Proficiency. Can perform this skill satisfactorily
but requires some assistance and/or supervision.
C
O
1 – Basic. Can perform parts of this skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision.
Check the appropriate box that corresponds to your level of performance in doing
each of the given tasks using the Scoring Rubric above.
D
PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
1
2
3
4
EP
E
Brought the first four ingredients: milk, water, butter and sugar
to boil.
Added all-purpose flour.
Removed from heat if desired consistency is attained.
When paste was already cooled, added the egg one at a time
and mixed thoroughly.
D
Placed the paste in the pastry bag and formed the cream puff
and éclair.
Baked at 4000 F for 20 min or until paste is puff then lower the
temperature to 3000 F. Continued baking for 20 minutes or until
brown. Set aside.
Assembled filling for cream puff and éclair.
Topped with powder sugar for cream puff and with ganache for
éclair.
214
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
LO 3. Prepare marzipan petit four


Flavor and shape Quality marzipan to produce mini-sized fruits in accordance
with enterprise and client requirements.
Coat Marzipan fruits to preserve desired eating characteristics and softened
with egg whites, piped into shapes and sealed/browned with applied heat,
according to enterprise practice.
PY
What do you need to know?
Lesson Information
C
O
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you can
remember. Find out how much you have learned by doing Activity
4.3.1 to 4.3.3.
D
Prepare and display marzipan based petit fours
EP
E
Marzipan is a sweetened mixture of ground almonds, liquid glucose or egg
whites, corn syrup or sugar syrup and either icing sugar or caster sugar. It is also
known as almond paste. Marzipan is a very versatile paste. Petit Fours based on a
marzipan are attractive and popular for their color and appearance and their delicate
pleasing taste.
Category of Marzipan
D
Group
A
B
C
Ingredients
Almond meal, blanched icing sugar
Brandy almond extract
Sugar syrup glucose, warm
Quantity
200g 275g
1tsp 1 drop
100ml +/ 40g
Procedure:
1. Sift the icing sugar and combine ingredients from group A into a bowl.
2. Add the ingredients from group B and gradually add the warm glucose.
3. Knead until it forms like dough.
4. Wrap tightly.
215
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
The marzipan needs to be stored and protected after making it. It will dry and
these dry pieces will have an unpleasant texture should it be incorporated into
the mix.
Modelled Marzipan
PY
Marzipans can be modelled into various fruit, vegetables, animals, and flower
shapes. The most popular items are small marzipan fruits served as petit fours or
candies. To store marzipan, wrap it in a plastic cling wrap and place it in an airtight
container.
EP
E
D
C
O
Fruits and Flowers
D
To make small fruits, divide the paste into equal portions first., Carefully cut
the rectangle into 4 rows of 8 to make 32 equal pieces with a knife. Begin by rolling
each piece between the palms of your hands into around ball that is perfectly smooth
and free of seams and cracks. Then start molding the balls with your fingers into the
shapes of pears, apples, and other fruits. The best way to make realistic looking
fruits is to use real fruits as models. Imitate the shapes of the real fruits as closely as
possible. You can add special effects using ordinary tools or special modelling tools.
Let the fruits dry overnight before coloring. Flowers such as carnations and
roses can be used to decorate cakes as well as display pieces.
216
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Enhance your skills in preparing marzipan petit
four by performing the following activity.
Activity 4.3.1
Making a Marzipan Strawberry
C
O
PY
Procedure:
1. Roll the ball of marzipan into a strawberry shape with the palms of your hands.
EP
E
D
2. Indent the stem end of the strawberry with an appropriate modelling tool.
D
3. Roll the strawberry in sugar to simulate the textured surface of the real berry.
4. Cut out a leaf shape for the stem end and fasten it in place using an appropriate
modelling tool.
217
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Find out how well you performed by accomplishing
the Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely.
Remember it is your learning which is at stake.
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
4 – Advanced. Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
PY
3 – Proficient. Can perform this skill satisfactorily without assistance or
supervision.
2 – Approaching to Proficiency. Can perform this skill satisfactorily but requires
some assistance and/or supervision.
C
O
1 – Basic. Can perform parts of this skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision.
Check the appropriate box that corresponds to your level of performance in doing
each of the given task using the Scoring Rubric above.
PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
1
2
3
4
EP
E
D
Rolled the ball of marzipan into a strawberry shape with the
palms of your hands.
Indented the stem end of the strawberry with an appropriate
modelling tool.
Rolled the strawberry in sugar to simulate the textured surface
of the real berry.
Cut out a leaf shape for the stem end and fastened it in place
using an appropriate modelling tool.
D
Enhance your skills in making marzipan petit fours by
performing the following activity below.
Activity 4.3.2
Making a Marzipan Orange
Procedure
1. Roll a piece of marzipan into a ball.
218
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
2. Using a marzipan modelling tool, make an
indentation in the ball to resemble the stem
end of the orange.
PY
Find out how well you performed by accomplishing the
Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely. Remember it is
your learning which is at stake.
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
C
O
4 – Advanced. Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
3 – Proficient. Can perform this skill satisfactorily without assistance or
supervision.
D
2 – Approaching to Proficiency. Can perform this skill satisfactorily but requires
some assistance and/or supervision.
EP
E
1 – Basic. Can perform parts of this skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision.
Check the appropriate box that corresponds to your level of performance in doing
each of the given tasks using the Scoring Rubric above,
PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
1 2 3 4
D
1. Rolled a piece of marzipan into a ball.
2. Using a marzipan modeling tool, made an indentation in the ball
to resemble the stem end of the orange.
219
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Enhance your skills in making and decorating
marzipan petit fours. Perform activity below.
Activity 4.3.3
C
O
PY
Making a Marzipan Rose
Procedure
1. Taper a ball of marzipan which will serve as the base of the rose.
D
2. Mold the ball with the tapered end pointing up which will serve as the center of
the flower.
D
EP
E
3. For the petals, roll a log of marzipan and cut equal pieces. Flatten these into
small disks.
4. Flatten the disks and taper the edges to paper thinness with the back of a spoon
in a circular motion.
220
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
5. Wrap the petal around the base. Leave one edge free so the second petal can be
inserted under it.
C
O
PY
6. Attach the second petal.
EP
E
D
7. Continue same fashion until the rose is the desired size. Cut the rose from the
base with a sharp knife.
D
Find outhow well you performed by accomplishing the
Scoring Rubric honestly and sincerely. Remember it is
your learning which is at stake.
PERFORMANCE LEVELS
4 – Advanced. Can perform this skill without supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
3 – Proficient. Can perform this skill satisfactorily without assistance or
supervision.
2 – Approaching to Proficiency. Can perform this skill satisfactorily but requires
some assistance and/or supervision.
1 – Basic. Can perform parts of this skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
assistance and/or supervision.
221
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Using the Scoring Rubric in the previous page, check the appropriate box that
corresponds to your level of performance in doing each of the given task.
PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
1
2
3
4
Tapered a ball of marzipan which served as the base of the
rose.
Molded the ball with the tapered end pointing up, to
serve as the center of the flower
For the petals, rolled a log of marzipan and cut equal pieces.
Flattened these into small disks.
PY
Flattened the disks and taper the edges to paper thinness with
the back of a spoon in a circular motion.
C
O
Wrapped the petal around the base leaving one edge free
so the second petal can be inserted under it.
Attached the second petal.
EP
E
Lesson Information
D
Continued the same fashion until the rose was the desired size.
Cut the rose from the base with a sharp knife.
Storage and Service of Petit Fours
Storage plays an important role in the production and serving of petit fours.
The environmental and individual characteristics of each item needs to be taken into
D
consideration. If the item is susceptible to humidity, it should be held airtight, vacuum
sealed when possible.
To maintain its freshness which is a defining characteristics of a petit fours, it
is produce as close to serving as possible. Caramelized petit four may have a shelf
life of roughly 1 to 2 weeks. Fresh petit fours are kept for shorter periods of time,
which varies by product. Freezing is a good option for many of the bases and dough
which can be made up ahead of time and held until ready to bake or assemble.
222
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
LO 4. Prepare Caramelized Petit Four
 Select and coat fresh fruits/fruit segments with pale amber-colored caramel
or glazed or any coating specified by the enterprise.
 Fill sandwich dried fruits or nuts with flavored marzipan and coated with pale
amber-colored caramel according to specifications and enterprise standards.
PY
What do you need to know?
Lesson Information
C
O
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you can
remember. Find out how much you have learned by performing
Activity 4. 4.1.
D
EP
E
D
Selection of fruits and nuts for caramelized petit four
Caramelized sugar can be used to coat petit fours before they are served.
Caramelized petit fours are mainly roasted nuts and dried fruits with marzipan.
Any product that is coated with caramel needs to be dried. Strawberry and
grapes can be dipped in caramel but only have a life span of a couple of hours. The
product is best consumed within 30-40 minutes is best.
223
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
The main problem here is the moisture from the inside of the fruit weeps out
and the hard caramel falls off of the product. Caramelized nuts and marzipan work
better if the product is dry to carry the caramel better.
C
O
PY
Preparation of caramelized petit four
 Put the product to be caramelized on a tray.
 Any fruit that is to be dipped in caramel needs to be dry and its skin needs to
be intact.
 Remove all the string and pith of orange.
 Grapes need to be in small clusters of 2 or 1.
 Nuts should be slightly roasted; raw nuts have a diminished flavor to them.
 Prepare the equipment needed before the making of the caramel.
 Having a prepared surface to place the caramel dipped product is also
important.
 An oiled surface will allow the caramel to cool and then not bond to the
surface.
 If hot caramel is placed onto an unprepared surface it will stick to the surface.
 The product will then crack when attempting to remove the product from that
surface.
EP
E
D
Preparation of coating for fruits
 Caramel is sugar that is cooked until it reaches a temperature of 156°C until it
begins to color. The color intensifies as the temperature increases.
 Caramel that has reached a temperature of 175°C is burnt. It will have the
very dark, almost black color and from this point on, it loses sweetness and
becomes bitter.
D
To make the caramel
 Dissolve a portion of sugar in some water; 4 parts sugar to 1 part water.
 Slowly heat until boiling. Stir occasionally to dissolve sugar before solution
boils.
 When solution reaches boiling point, add 10% liquid glucose of sugar weight.
 Stir gently to dissolve glucose.
 Skim any scum that rises to the top.
 Wash sides of pot down with pastry brush and cold water.
 Allow solution to cook until temperature reaches 160ºC.
 Do not stir the solution while it boils as this may cause crystallization to occur.
 As solution rises above 160ºC it will begin to change colour to light amber
color.
224
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com




When solution has colored to desired caramel colour, remove from heat and
arrest the cooking process by placing base of pot into cold water.
Leave in cold water until solution stops boiling.
The solution is now ready to use.
Speed and efficiency is needed here because as the solution cools the
caramel becomes thicker and harder to work.

Some product can be dipped by holding bottom of product and dipping
of
the product into hot caramel. Care needs to be taken here as the danger of
burning fingers is high.
Hold product above caramel and allow excess to flow back into pot. Sit
product on oiled surface to cool.
D

C
O
PY
Coating caramelized petit fours
 Dip the product into the hot caramel.
 Take a dipping fork into oil and then pick up the product and let it drop into
the toffee.
 Use the oil covered tines of the fork to roll the product in the hot caramel.
Remove the product from the hot caramel. The caramel covered product
should slide off the fork onto the prepared surface that has been smeared
with oil to prevent sticking.
 Allow caramel to cool before removing to paper cup for storage.
D
EP
E
Safety precautions
 Have a bowl of cold water when working with hot caramel.
 Hot caramel can cause damage skin on contact.
 Avoid wiping hot caramel off as it will just cause more damage.
 Place the affected area into the cold water. This will cool and set the caramel.
It can then be peeled off with minimal damage to skin surface.
 The damage is already done and blisters will ensure.
 This technique is about minimizing further damage to other parts of the body.
225
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Activity 4.4.1
Research and prepare caramelized petit four of your choice. Your output will
be rated using the Scoring Rubric below.
Poor
(1)
D
II. Procedures
Fair
(2)
C
O
1. General Appearance
a. Dish is attractive and appetizing.
b. Dish is pleasing to look at and with good
color combination.
c. Ingredients are cooked just right.
d. Dish has just the right consistency.
2. Palatability
a. Dish is delicious.
b. Dish tastes just right.
3. Nutritive value
a. Dish is highly nutritious
Good
(3)
PY
Very
Good (4)
I. Products
D
EP
E
1. Use of Resources:
a. The learner keeps the working table
orderly while preparing the ingredients.
b. The learner uses only the proper and
needed utensils and dishes.
c. The
learner
uses
time-saving
techniques and devices
2. Cleanliness and sanitation
a. The learner is well- groomed and
properly dressed for cooking; He/she
makes use of a clean apron, hair nets,
hand towel, and pot holders.
b. The learner practices sanitary handling
of food.
3. Conservation of nutrients
a. The learner follows proper preparation
and cooking procedures.
b. The learner follows the recipe correctly.
226
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
LO5. Display Caramelized Petit Four


Select and prepare appropriate receptacles for petit fours.
Display petit fours creatively to enhance customer appeal.
PY
What do you need to know?
Lesson Information
C
O
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you can
remember.
D
EP
E
D
Displaying caramelized petit fours
 Attractive presentation of petit fours catches customer’s attention.
 To make it looks more attractive, arrange it neatly.
 A neat uncluttered, clean and tidy display is essential.
 This greatly affects the visual impact and appreciation of the viewer and will
tempt the customer to indulge.
 All varieties of petit fours are best served fresh.
 Use of ceramics plates and platters, glass, mirrors, trays is effective in buffet
style service.
 The recommended serving is 3 - 4 pieces per plate.
 Caramelized petit fours need to be served fresh and in paper containers. This
makes it easy for the customer to handle them.
Points to remember
Prepare and display caramelized petit fours
Select fruits/nuts
 For easier handling, make sure that the fruits skin and stem are still attached.
 Fruit needs to be dry.
 Dispose broken and chipped nuts.
227
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Prepare products
 Product should be clean and smooth and no foreign matter is attached.
 Prepare marzipan flavor fillings between nuts or insert into dates.
Prepare coating for fruits
 Caramelized sugar should be heated sufficiently in high temperatures that it
sets with a “crack”.
 A light amber color should be present; hence the name caramel.
PY
Coat caramelized petit fours
 Handle hot caramel with care.
 Product should have a dry surface for the caramel to bond.
 The product should be cooled in a non-stick ability-oiled surface.
C
O
Display caramelized petit fours
 Give the normal display characteristics of the product.
 Highlight attributes of product.
 Show craftsmanship in display.
 Alternate shapes to improve eye appeal.
 Alternate heights to break up profile.
LO6. Store petit four
EP
E

Store petit fours in proper temperatures and conditions to maintain maximum
eating qualities, appearance and freshness.
Package petit fours in accordance with established standards and
procedures.
D

D
What do you need to know?
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you can
remember.
Lesson Information
Proper storage of caramelized petit four
 All prepared petit fours will suffer from too much moisture in the environment.
 A cool dry closed environment is best for storage of all petit fours except
those that contain perishable ingredients like fresh cream.
228
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com



Caramelized petit four will have a short life span as the caramel is
hydroscopic and attracts moisture from the air. This moisture causes the
sugar to soften and dissolve.
Products such as fruit, grapes and strawberries will ooze moisture from their
internal structure causing the caramel to dislodge from the surface of the fruit.
This is caused by the fact that the moisture just under the surface of the skin
boils, breaking the cellular structure of the fruit and the moisture held inside
seeps through the damaged skin.
90% of petit fours should be stored in cool dry environment for storage.
PY

Maintain maximum eating quality, appearance and freshness




D

It is a mistake to produce more than can be used in defined periods. It may
be more economically viable to produce large numbers of a certain product.
To maintain freshness petit fours should be finished as needed.
Part processing can be achieved like making shortbread and freezing.
Bake as needed which may take space and time in freezer.
The best way to have fresh petit fours is to produce them regularly and as
needed.
Protect finished petit four from adverse conditions to maintain structural
integrity by enclosing in food safe containers.
C
O

EP
E
Lesson 5: PRESENT DESSERT
EXPECTED OUTCOMES:
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to
D
LO1. Present and serve plated dessert.
LO2. Plan, prepare and present dessert buffet selection or
plating.
LO3. Store and package dessert.
LO 1. Present and serve plated dessert

Portion and present desserts according to product items, occasion and
enterprise standards and procedures.

Plate and decorate desserts in accordance with enterprise standards and
procedures.
229
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Overview of Dessert Plating
C
O
What do you need to know?
PY
The art of the plated dessert is a fairly new aspect today. Plating styles have
changed. Gradually, pastry chefs began to shift their focus back to flavor, discovering
that they could create great-looking and great tasting desserts without building
towering constructions.
An important factor in the development of plating styles is the way pastry and
kitchen chefs work together as a team to shape the culinary identity of the restaurant.
Dessert menus are treated as continuations of the dining experience, not simply as
an unrelated sweet course tacked on at the end.
Dessert plating styles are constantly changing and evolving. Thanks to
today’s creative pastry chefs.
EP
E
Lesson Information
D
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you can
remember.
PLATING DESSERT
D
Components of a plated dessert
Plated dessert presentations or simply plated desserts are desserts that are
served by an establishment such as restaurant, resort, or dessert café after it is
ordered by a guest and enjoyed on site.
There are four components of a plated dessert: The main item, the dessert
sauces, the crunch component, and the garnish. A plated dessert should have all
of these items, but if it lacks any one of these items except for the main item it can
230
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
still be a plated dessert. It is widely believed that all of the components should be
edible. Many chefs believe that each component should be eaten as well.
Three main goals of plated dessert
1. To satisfy the customer
This emphasizes flavor above all else, though you can argue that the actual
visual design of the plate also satisfies a customer.
PY
2. To complement the venue’s theme
This emphasizes the visual and creative expressions of a dessert continue to
bring customers back.
C
O
3. To make a dessert that is affordable in the terms of the restaurant
This is in terms of both complexity and price. A dessert that is too complex
will put too much stress on the kitchen staff when it needs to be reproduced
and a dessert that is too expensive will never be purchased by the customer.
EP
E
D
Four components of plated dessert
1. The Main Item
D
The main item can be anything such as a slice of pie, a mini tart, a
cluster of cookies, custard. It is the actual dessert itself. The product should
weigh between three and five ounces but it is not unusual for it to weigh as
much as 8 ounces. The main item should never be large that is
overwhelming. It should be the main focal point of the dessert presentation.
It should be the main source of flavor for the presentation while the other
components contrast and complement it.
231
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
PY
2. The Sauce
D
EP
E
D
3. Crunch Component
C
O
Plated desserts should have up to two sauces each. Overall the
sauces should not weigh more than one to two ounces with the exception of a
flooded design. Sauce is very important for dry items like pies and cakes
although a sauce can also be added to any dessert. The sauces used should
be about the same consistency. The sauces should be able to hold their
own shape. This allows for dessert sauces to be manipulated like paint to
create fun designs.
A crunch component is an added component that adds a crunch to
the dessert. It is usually a dry decorative cookie or biscuit added to any
dessert to make it crunchy. exactly how it sounds. It enriches the dish and
makes the flavor of the dish more enjoyable from the first bite up to the last.
This is especially important to soft desserts like custard and ice cream.
232
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
4. Garnish
C
O
PY
The garnish is the final component of a plated dessert. Common
garnishes include fresh mint leaves, powdered sugar, chocolate piping, fruit,
chocolate and sugar work, and sorbet. Garnish should be used with restraint
just as much as it should be used tastefully. A garnish that is over used loses
its effect and can ruin a dessert. The most commonly over used garnish is
the mint leaf. Although a mint leaf has a refreshing flavor and adds a color to
desserts, this garnish is very common. A pastry chef should push his
boundaries and use his creativity to find a garnish that works better than a
mint leaf.
Portion control
D
Portion control means ensuring that the right quantity of food is prepared and
served every time a customer orders a menu item. Dishes can be served in different
profile.
EP
E
-Single dessert: larger portion
-Buffet dessert: smaller portion.
Restaurants can present greater variety while maintaining cost control and
quality. In other words, customers will be consistently satisfied every time they visit.
D
Sample dessert plating
Here is a picture from Pastry’s Best magazine last Nov. 2006 of Alicia
Prescott’s coconut cream caramel with pan fried banana bread, mango papaya
piccalilli, and pistachio lime tuiles. Note that the main item is the flan and everything
233
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
PY
seems to draw your eye toward it. Notice all the different shapes used to give the
presentation life and energy.
D
EP
E
D
C
O
This is from Grand Finales: The Art of Plated Dessert by Tish Boyle and
Timothy Moriarty. Notice the size of the main item which is a scoop of sorbet
compared to the rest of the dessert. While unmistakably stunning, the size of the
main item is a little underwhelming. In truth, this plate is normally used as an
intermezzo or palate refresher and probably does not take much time to make.
Here is another dessert from Grand Finales: The Art of Plated Dessert by
Tish Boyle and Timothy Moriarty. Notice the chocolate squiggles that give lots of
height to an otherwise flat dessert. Notice how the colors play off of each other so
well but do not overwhelm one another as well. They work together to make the plate
look appetizing.
234
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
C
O
PY
l
This is Chef Jim Graham’s White Coffee Ice Cream taken from Grand
Finales: The Art of Plated Dessert by Tish Boyle and Timothy Moriarty. It is so simple
and complex at the same time. It features a simple style and a random arrangement
but most of all, it is monochromatic. It isn’t all white but shades of white and the
result is a beautiful layer of depth.
LO 2. Plan, prepare and present dessert buffet selection or plating
EP
E
D
 Plan and utilize dessert buffet services according to available facilities,
equipment and customer/enterprise requirements.
 Prepare and arrange variety of desserts in accordance with enterprise
standards and procedures.
What do you need to know?
D
Read the Lesson Information closely then find out how much you
can remember.
Lesson Information
Dessert Presentations
Desserts can be presented in a variety of ways: as party favors, in a dessert
buffet or as a grouping of delicious confections aimed at dazzling your guests.
There are certain desserts that should be available for display but it depends
on the available facilities.
235
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Plan a dessert display appropriate to the location.

Will it be displayed in a fully equipped commercial kitchen in a five star
location?

Will it be displayed at a tranquil picnic spot by the river 25 kilometres from the
place of production?

If there is no electricity then the possibilty of having ice cream is now greatly
diminshed and chilled cream cakes and desserts will not be on the menu.
Facilities
Electricity

Working space

Ability of the staff in the kitchen

Ability of the staff front of house

Quality of the equipment that is given to work with

Preparation of the product can be conducted elsewhere.
C
O
PY

D
All these possibilities need to be considered when planning the dessert display.
serving platters
sauce jugs
plates
cutlery
napkins
tongs
lifters
refrigerated cooling
hot display bain marie.
D









EP
E
Desirable equipment for display
Production, storage and service requirements.
After the product has been produced and stored, the equipment needed to
display and serve desserts need to be taken into consideration, as well as where it is
going to be served.
236
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Choice of Location


Most establishments will be operating out of hotel and restaurant kitchens
with all the required equipment.
Prudent management practices require a complete list of all equipment that
may be required to be taken 'offsite' for when customer desires a function 'by
the river' or “in the park”.
Complexity of dessert

Some desserts are more complex than others to serve.
Hot souffle needs special consideration and teamwork so it is not desirable to
place on menu for dessert display.
Cold souffle would be a better choice for a dessert display. It will stand at
room temperature for short periods if required.
PY


EP
E
D
C
O
In summary, always keep in mind these general concepts when planning dessert
presentations.
 Every component should have a purpose. Do not add elements merely to
make the plate fuller. Limit the items added primarily for decoration.
 Components or elements can work together by complementing or by
contrasting.
 When elements contrast, be sure they balance. For example, when you
balance a rich mousse with a tart fruit sauce, be sure the sauce isn’t so tart or
strong flavored that it overwhelms the mousse.
 It is possible to get carried away with the concept of balance. It is not
necessary to garnish every soft dessert with something crisp or every hot
dessert with something old. Sometimes customers prefer just a plain,
unadorned dish of ice cream or a simple slice of warm apple pie.
LO 3. Store and package desserts

D

Store desserts in accordance with the required temperature and customer’s
specifications.
Package desserts in accordance with established standards and procedures.
What do you need to know?
Read Lesson Information closely then find out how much you can
remember. Find out how much you have learned by performing
Activity 5.3.1.
237
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Lesson Information
Storing desserts
Knowing the shelf life of a dessert or dessert accompaniment can broaden a
host's list of sweet selections for an appropriate ending to a holiday menu. Here are
suggestions that will inspire and assist a dessert cook.

PY

C
O

Puff pastry shells, the crisp casings for fresh fruit or pastry cream can be
baked ahead and cooled. They may be left on the baking sheet for protection,
covered with foil and stored in the freezer for up to one week.
Pate a choux or cream puff pastry for eclairs or cream puffs. They can be
stored in rigid airtight containers in the freezer up to five days. Do not store in
the refrigerator because pastry absorbs odors and can be stale quickly.
Baked cream puffs freeze beautifully up to one month when tightly covered.
When filled with ice cream and frozen cream puffs should be made with milk
instead of water which freezes more solidly, making the puffs hard and dry.
Classic puff pastry dough can be wrapped in plastic and stored in the
refrigerator up to three days. If freezing, overwrap plastic wrapped dough with
foil and freeze up to three months. Thaw in refrigerator 24 hours before
rolling.
Avoid odor absorption

D

The butter cream when well-covered to prevent odor absorption can be
stored in the refrigerator up to one week in the freezer up to one month. Allow
to stand at room temperature one hour after removing from freezer or
refrigerator, then beat until smooth.
Whipping cream will be more stable if slowly beaten and not over whipped.
Granulated or extra fine sugar and vanilla may be added before whipping.
The royal icing keeps three to four weeks in the refrigerator and can be
rebeaten before used. To keep it from hardening, cover with plastic wrap and
place damp towel over the top.
Store baklava or other sweet, sticky filo pastries at room temperature,
uncovered, up to eight hours. To refresh, bake for 10 minutes at 400 0 F.
Baked sweet or short crust pastry shells can be stored in plastic bags in
refrigerator up to two days or frozen up to one month.
Unbaked pastry dough can be shaped into a disc, placed in freezer plastic
bag. Defrost at room temperature or refrigerator until softened but still very
cold for easier rolling.
Pavlovas and other meringue sheets or circles may be stored in airtight metal
containers at room temperature up to one week. This may not work in humid
EP
E

D





238
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com

areas. In humid or rainy weather, dry them in a 225 degree oven, 20 to 30
minutes longer and use immediately.
Butter cream filled and frosted meringue tortes freeze well up to three days
but taste best at room temperature.
Storing cold and hot desserts
As many desserts contain egg and dairy products, they present a potential
health hazard if not stored properly. Proper storage means cooled desserts must be
covered with plastic or placed in lidded containers before storing in the cool room.
C
O
PY
Observe the following guidelines.
 Desserts containing uncooked eggs should be handled with extreme care, as raw
egg is a medium in which dangerous bacteria such as salmonella can thrive. This
means you need to be really careful with food such as chocolate mousse and
uncooked cheesecakes that contain egg whites for aeration.
Egg custards contain protein, which provides good food for bacteria. If custards
such as crème caramel or trifle are not heated and cooled properly and quickly,
bacteria that are present in the custard can grow quickly to dangerous numbers.

Any dessert that is not required for immediate consumption must be cooled
immediately and stored in the cool room until required.

If you plan to keep a pre-prepared dessert hot until service, make sure that the
temperature of the food is over 65oC. Never leave an egg mixture in a Bain Marie
for any length of time. Any dessert that has been kept hot in the Bain Marie for a
while should be discarded at the end of service.
EP
E
D

If milk and cream are used in desserts such as trifle and custards, they must not
be left to stand at room temperature for any length of time. They should be kept
in the refrigerator until the last possible moment to prevent the risk of food
poisoning.

Many desserts have a limited storage life. Make sure you check with your
supervisor and follow organisational requirements.
D

Packaging Materials for Storing Desserts
 glass container
 plastic container
 plastic/cellophane
 aluminum foil
 packaging tapes
 boxes
239
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Equipment
 chiller
 freezer
 refrigerator
PY
Sanitary Practices When Storing Desserts
 Handle the food properly to prevent spoilage and contamination.
 Wash utensils and equipment thoroughly.
 Keep away from food when you are ill.
 Store foods and ingredients properly.
 Safeguard the food during distribution and service.
Lesson Information
D
Packaging desserts
C
O
Storage Techniques
 Refrigerate – to keep cold or cool
 Cold Storage – the process of storing food by means of refrigeration
 Chilling – to refrigerate or to reduce the temperature of food
EP
E
When packaging desserts, there are several things to consider, such as
protection, tampering resistance, and special physical, chemical, or biological needs.
The nutritional information must also be displayed in the product label.
The main aim of packaging is to keep the food in good condition until it is sold
and consumed. It should also attract and encourage customers to purchase the
product. Correct packaging is essential to achieve both these objectives.
D
Packaging should provide the correct environmental conditions for food,
starting from the time food is packed until its consumption. A good package should
therefore have the following functions:



Provide a barrier against dirt and other contaminants keeping the product
clean.
Prevent losses. For example, packages should be securely closed to
prevent leakage.
Protect food against physical and chemical damage such as the harmful
effects of air, light, insects, and rodents. Each product will have its own
needs.
240
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com



Provide protection and convenience in handling and transport during
distribution and marketing.
Help the customers identify the food and instruct them how to use it
correctly.
Prevents any wastage such as leakage or deterioration which may occur
during transportation and distribution.
Types of Packaging materials
In many developing countries the most commonly used packaging materials include:
EP
E
D
Vegetable fiber basket
PY
vegetable fiber
papers, newsprint
glass
plastics
C
O




D
These include bamboo, banana, coconut, and cotton fibers. These natural
materials are converted into yarn, string, or cord which will then form the packaging
material. These materials are very flexible, with resistance to tearing, and are
lightweight for handling and transportation. All of these materials are biodegradable
and re-usable because they came from vegetables.
Paper
Paper is an inexpensive packaging material. It is, however, highly
absorptive, fairly easily torn, and offers no barrier to water or gases.
241
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
The degree of paper reuse will depend on its former use. Therefore, dirty or
stained paper should be rejected. Newsprint should be used only as a outer wrapper
and should not come into direct contact with food, as the ink used is toxic.
PY
Glass
EP
E





Glass is able to withstand heat treatments such as pasteurization and
sterilization.
It does not react with food.
It protects the food from crushing and bruising.
It is resistant to moisture, gases, odors and microorganisms.
It is reusable, re-sealable and recyclable
It is transparent which allows products to be displayed. Colored glass
may be used either to protect the food from light or to attract customers.
D

C
O
Glass has many properties which make it a popular choice as a packaging
material.
Disadvantages of using glass as packaging materials

D

Glass is heavier than many other packaging materials and this may lead
to higher transport costs.
It can be easily fractured, scratched and broken when heated or cooled
too quickly.
Potentially serious hazards may arise from glass cracks or fragments in
the food.

242
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
PY
Plastics
C
O
The use of various plastics for containing and wrapping food depends on what
is available. Plastics are extremely useful as they can be made in either soft or hard
forms, as sheets or containers, and with different thickness, light resistance, and
flexibility. The filling and sealing of plastic containers is similar to glass containers.
D
Activity 5.3.1
EP
E
You have been assigned to prepare, present and serve dessert to the town
Mayor who will visit your school. Apply all what you have learned to make your
dessert presentable and appetizing. Your output will be rated using the Scoring
Rubric below.
Your performance will be rated using the Scoring Rubric below
Very
Good
(4)
D
I. Products
Good
(3)
Fair
(2)
Poor
(1)
1. General Appearance
a. Dish is attractive and appetizing.
b. Dish is pleasing to look at and with good
color combination.
c. Ingredients are cooked just right.
d. Dish has just the right consistency.
2. Palatability
a. Dish is delicious.
b. Dish tastes just right.
3. Nutritive value
a. Dish is highly nutritious
243
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
D
C
O
1. Use of Resources:
a. The learner keeps the working table
orderly while preparing the ingredients.
b. The learner uses only the proper and
needed utensils and dishes.
c. The
learner
uses
time-saving
techniques and devices
4. Cleanliness and sanitation
a. The learner is well- groomed and
properly dressed for cooking; He/she
makes use of a clean apron, hair nets,
hand towel, and pot holders.
b. The learner practices sanitary handling
of food.
5. Conservation of nutrients
a. The learner follows proper preparation
and cooking procedures.
b. The learner follows the recipe correctly.
PY
II. Procedures
EP
E
How much have you learned?
Post-assessment
D
1. Which is an added component of desserts, which is essential for soft
desserts like custard and ice cream?
A. crunch
B. garnish
C. main item
D. sauce
2. Which ensures the right quantity of food is prepared and served to
customers?
A. markup
B. portion control
C. standard size
D. yield
244
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
3. Which is an icing made of butter and/or shortening blended with
confectioner’s or sugar syrup, and other ingredients?
A. butter cream
B. custard
C. ganache
D. syrup
PY
4. Which is a rich cream made of chocolate and heavy cream?
A. butter cream
B. custard
C. ganache
D. syrup
C
O
5. Which is an edible mixture used to fill pastries, sandwiches, or cakes?
A. ganache
B. butter cream
C. filling
D. custard
D
6. What type of icing is made of boiled sugar syrup that is agitated so that it
would crystallize into a mass of extremely small white crystals?
A. butter cream
B. custard
C. filling
D. fondant
EP
E
7. In how many days can a custard filing be stored in the refrigerator?
A. 3 days
B. 4 days
C. 5 days
D. 6 days
D
8. Which refers to dry- heat cooking that is usually done in an oven?
A. baking
B. broiling
C. grilling
D. stewing
9. Which fine white flour, made from soft wheat, contains 79% protein?
A. all-purpose flour
B. bread flour
C. cake flour
D. pastry flour
10. Which is a light cake made of meringue and flour?
A. angel food cake
B. butter cake
C. chiffon cake
D. sponge cake
245
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
11. It is a miniature bit-sized confection coated with icing.
A. fresh petit four
B. iced petit four
C. marzipan
D. petit four
12. It is a petit four decorated or covered with fondant icing.
A. fresh petit four
B. iced petit four
C. marzipan
D. petit four
PY
13. It is a tiny fresh fruit tartlet.
A. fresh petit four
B. iced petit four
C. marzipan
D. petit four
C
O
14. It is a paste or confection icing or filling made of meringue and gelatin.
A. fresh petit four
B. iced petit four
C. marzipan
D. petit four
EP
E
D
15. It is a paste made of almonds and sugar that is worked to plastic
consistency.
A. fresh petit four
B. iced petit four
C. marzipan petit four
D. petit four
D
16. What petit four filling enhances flavor, adds moisture, and binds the product?
A. butter
B. ganache
C. jams
D. meringue
17. Which mixture of chocolate and cream is used as filing for iced petit four?
A. butter
B. ganache
C. jams
D. meringue
18. What is the final component of a plated dessert?
A. crunch
B. garnish
C. main item
D. sauce
246
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
19. What dessert component is the actual dessert itself?
A. crunch
B. garnish
C. main item
D. sauce
D
C
O
PY
20. Which dessert component which attributes in moist characteristics of
dessert?
A. crunch
B. garnish
C. main item
D. sauce
GENERALIZATION:
EP
E
This module gave opportunity to learners to develop their skills in
preparing, decorating and presenting petit fours and desserts according to
standard operating procedures and techniques.
D
This prepares learners to the world of work or for employment where
they can apply what they have learned in earning an income and eventually
become productive citizens of the country.
247
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
References
Books

PY


Internet Sources


/images/view;_ylt=A2oKiHJo.ahVvV8AbaAGIY
10 Tips for How to Plate Desserts for Restaurant-Style Results by
Jessie Oleson Moore, May 29, 2014, accessed from
www.craftsg.com/bloc/2014/05/how-to-plate-desserts/
akery_network_food_franchise.htm
Cersan.ru/cat/web/layered+cake+recipes+with+filling
copy c Sarah Philips craftybaking . com
http:/tasty-italian-cooking.com/fresh-pasta.html
http ://pattysfood.com/cake/valentines-day-red-velvet-cupcakes-karascupcake-boot-camp/
http://adrianfoster.com/?p=206
http://alliwannadoisbake.blogspot.com/2010/06/bread-festivalcontinues.html
http://articles.latimes.com/19871122/food/fo24009_1_roomtemperature
http://cacm.acm.org/magazines/2013/7/165476-cake-cutting/abstract
http://eyeonlifemag.com/food-drink/baking-temperatures-for-pies-andpastries.html
http://forums.egullet.org/topic/62036-strawberry-cake-recipe/
http://gracessweetlife.com/2012/10/cherry-danish-pastries-dolci-dipasta-sfoglia-danese-alla-ciliegia/
http://imgkid.com/crust.shtm
http://joythebaker.com/2008/03/how-to-frost-a-cake-in-10-pictures/
EP
E





C
O



Basbas, Leonora. Culinary Arts II.
Bayona, Evelyn P. Cake Decorating Handouts (Frosting/lcing).
Berolzheimer, Ruth. Culinary Arts Institute Encyclopedic Cookbook
Gisslen, Wayne. Professional Baking sixth edition.
Gonzales, Nancy Cameros. Philippines Home Economics Baking
Basics.
Home Technology, Culinary Arts I, SEDP Series
Rojo. Technology and home economics III
Stewart, Martha. CAKES First-ever book of bundts, loaves, layers,
coffee cakes and more. Clarkson Potter/ Publishers.
ASEAN 2012 Trainee Manual
National Food Service Management Institute. (2007). On the Road to
Professional Food Preparation: Breakfast Lunch Training (2nd. Ed.)
Ebnesajjad, Sina, ed. Plastic Films in Food Packaging: Materials,
Technology and Aplicaitons. Elsevier Science, 2012. accessed from
https://books.google.com.ph/books?id=mzsuWQ96ydYC
D





D









248
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com








EP
E









PY



C
O


http://lunalunamag.com/2014/01/20/dead-yet-vintage-baking-madeeasy/creaming-butter-sugar-baking-vintage/
http://nativeleaf.info/?p=106
http://news.pennmedicine.org/blog/2014/12/the-falalala-fallacies-aboutholiday-weight-gain.html
http://oderose.fr/product_info.php?products_id=122
http://photos1.blogger.com/img/196/2249/640/collage1.jpg
http://thebakingpan.con/ measurements-and- weightconversion?#sthashUD3FJCWP.dpuf
http://www.aeht2015.it/
http://www.bestrecipes.com.au/article/different-types-of-icing-a142.html
http://www.clairejustineoxox.com/2013_02_10_archive.html
http://www.clementspastry.com/wholesale/gourmet/petitfourswhiteicedwi
thflowers/
http://www.cookingclassy.com/2014/01/cannoli-cream-puffs/
http://www.craftsy.com/blog/2014/05/how-to-plate-desserts/
http://www.craftybaking.com/howto/mixing-method-folding
http://www.cravebits.com/satisfy-sweet-tooth-egg-less-chocolate-cakertr/
http://www.dazzlemdesserts.com/prodresults2.php?selCat=32
http://www.ehow.com/info_8429574_typespetitfours.html
http://www.elpetitfour.com/petit_fours.html
http://www.groupon.co.uk/browse/aberdeen
http://www.grouprecipes.com/18918/fast-and-easy-swiss-roll-cake.html
http://www.highbeam.com/doc/1G1184188380.html
http://www.jamesbeard.org/recipes/golden-cake-batter-bread
http://www.joyofbaking.com/IngredientSubstitution.html#ixzz3gF7G0H00
http://www.kingarthurflour.com/blog/2013/02/19/danish-pastry-beautyor-the-beast/
http://www.lancaster.k12.oh.us/userfiles/816/Classes/7685/tm_prepare_
&_display_petit_fours_final.pdf?id=538796
http://www.newvegantable.com/2010/11/flaking-out/
http://www.nfsmi.org/documentlibraryfiles/PDF/20100211045002.pdf
http://www.ninisite.com/discussion/thread.asp?threadID=1010133&Page
Number=9http
http://www.pastrypal.com/2009/07/ginger-ice-cream-might-change-yourlife/
http://www.pfm.it/en/packaging-machinery-applications/packagingsamples/bakery-products.html
http://www.pillsburybaking.com/bakers-corner/baking-tips/all-aboutcakes/keeping-cakes-fresh-and-flavorful
D

D







249
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com




https://www.pinterest.com/pin/227009637437453740/
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=X0B8lH2rRS8&hd=1
Megaslides.com/doo/123057/gcse_exam_theme 2014_tes Food
Technology GCSE Theme 2014: CakeDecoration
Methods featured in Professional Baking, Sixth Edition by Wayne
Gisslen. © 2013 John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
Methods featured in Professional Baking, Sixth Edition by Wayne
Gisslen. © 2013 John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
Th4.ilovetranslation.com/hFef03mqWA
www.doctoc.com/petit-fours
www.lancaster.k12.oh.us/userfiles/816
www.pillsburybaking.com/bakers-corner/baking-tips/all-aboutcakes/keeping-cakes-fresh-and-flavorful
www.recipetips.com/kitchen-tips/t--1649/cake-storage-requirements.asp
www.thebakerynetwork.com
www.wilton.com/ems-storing-cakes.html
www1.academia.edu/10040885
www.entrepreneur.com/encyclopedia/packaging
EP
E








PY



C
O

http://www.puffpastry.com/recipe/60320/puff-pastry-wrapped-brie
http://www.recipetips.com/kitchen-tips/t--1648/cake-filling-types.asp
http://www.recipetips.com/kitchen-tips/t--1649/cake-storagerequirements.asp
http://www.recipetips.com/kitchen-tips/t--808/how-to-make-a-single-piecrust.asp
http://www.sugar.org/allaboutsugar/sugar-in-bakery-food
http://www.sugoodsweets.com/blog/tag/fancy-food-show
http://www.tasteofhome.com/cooking-tips/general-food-tips/preheatingthe-oven
http://www.tasteofhome.com/recipes/prettypetitfours
http://www.theauberginechef.com/techniquesplateddesserts/
http://www.thekitchn.com/expert-advice-how-to-wrap-stor-151924
http://www.waitrose.com/home/recipes/step_by_step/how_to_make_sw
eet_pastry.html
http://www.wikihow.com/Measure-Wet-Ingredients
http://www.wilton.com/cakes/displaying-cakes/storing-cakes.cfm
http://www.wilton.com/cakes/making-cakes/filling-cake-layers.cfm
https://bakingthroughmsbh.wordpress.com/2010/04/30/jam-bars
https://www.google.com.ph/search?newwindow=1&site=&source=hp&q
D





D








250
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
ANSWER KEY
BREAD and PASTRY PRODUCTION NC II
Quarter I
Module No. I- Prepare and Produce Bakery Products
Lesson No. 1- Prepare bakery products
PY
Self – check 1.1.1
1 c sugar
D
Self – check 1.1.2
=
6 tbsp. cocoa plus 2 tbsp. fat
5 tbsp. plus 1 tsp. margarine
¼ tbsp.all-purpose flour
1/8 tsp baking soda plus
Plus 1/3 tsp cream of
Tartar
16 tbsp. sugar
C
O
2 oz chocolate
=
1/3 c butter
=
1 c cake flour
=
½ tsp baking powder =
EP
E
A. Six major ingredients in baking
1. Flour
2. Sugar
3. Egg
4. Shortening
5. Leavening agent
6. Liquid ingredient
D
B. Minor ingredients
 Flavoring
 Vanilla
 Salt
 Spices (Cloves. Cinnamon, Mace, Nutmeg)
 Wines
 Coffee
 Chocolate and Cocoa
C. Effects of sugar in baking
 increases dough development
 makes the color of the crust richer
 improves the nutritive value, flavor and aroma of the product
 makes the bread more tender
 increase the volume of the loaf
251
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com



serves as food for the yeast
contributes to moisture content of baked products, increasing its storing
quality
acts as creaming agent
Activity 1.1.2
HOTCAKE
All-purpose flour
Egg
Filling
Milk
baking powder
SIOPAO
All-purpose flour
Shortening
C
O
PANDESAL
Bread flour
Egg
Shortening
Milk
Yeast
PY
Your list should be as specific:
EP
E
Self – check 1.1.3
D
Ask your teacher to rate or evaluate your product. If you did not rate very well.
Find out what went wrong. List the possible factors that could have influence the
result of your product. Was the flour already stale?
B
F
E
D
A
C
D
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Self – check 1.1.5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Sifting
Creaming
Cutting –in
Folding
Whipping
252
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Lesson No. 2- Decorate and Present Pastry Products
Self – check 1.2.1
1. Sugar
2. 7 – minute boiling icing
3. Ganache
4. Meringue
5. Royal icing
PY
Self – check 1.2.2
Answers may vary.
C
O
Self – check 1.3.1
Self – check 1.3.2
Cold storage
Wrapping
Freezing
Chilling
Packaging method
D
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EP
E
Answers may vary
ANSWER KEY
D
Quarter II
Lesson 1. PREPARE and PRODUCE PASTRY PRODUCTS
LO 1 Prepare pastry products
Self – check 1.1
1. 3 tsp
2. ¾ cup
3. 2 tbsp
4. 8 tbsp
5. 8 tbsp
Self – check 1.2
1. Beating
2. Laminating
3. Cutting – in
4. Rolling
5. whisking
253
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Shelf – check 1.3
1. A
2. A
3. C
4. C
5. B
6. C
7. A
8. B
9. B
10. A
Self- check 1.4
1.
400°F to 425°F
2.
350°F to 425°F
3.
400°F to 425°F
PY
LO 2 Decorate and pastry products
C
O
Self – check 2.1
1. B
2. A
3. C
4. D
5. F
6. E
Self – check 2.2
Rules for garnishing pastry products
D
EP
E
D
1. Garnishes should be edible.
2. Simplicity is beauty and therefore garnishes should appear natural, fresh and
dainty – never overworked or overdone.
3. A few small groups of garnish are often more attractive than a continuous
decorative scheme.
4. Colors should harmonize – never clash. Contrasting colors usually produce an
artistic picture. Use of artificial coloring should be kept to the minimum.
5. Garnishes which are highly seasoned do not taste good.
6. Garnishes need not be expensive.
7. The setting must be viewed as a whole
8. Peach cream pie
9. Fresh fruit pie
10. Butterflies and bow tie pie
Self – check 2.3
1 Consistency
2 Moisture content
3 Appearance
4 Color of the product
254
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Downloaded from www.shsph.blogspot.com
Quarter III
Self-check 3.1.5
Self-check 3.2.2
1. B
1)3
1) 3
2. C
2) 4
2) 2
3. E
3) 6
3) 4
4) 5
4) 5
5) 7
5) 1
6) 8
6) 6
4. D
5. A
Self-check 3.1.2
PY
Self-Check 3.1.1
7) 2
7) 7
1. Portion control
4. Weighing
5. Counting
Self-check3. 1.3
10) 10
Self-check 3.3.1
Self-check 3.1.6
1. Chocolate ganache
1. D
2. Cream cheese
2. E
3. Royal icing
3. A
4. Butter cream
4. B
5. Whipped cream
5. C
Self-check 3.5.1
Self-check 3.2.1
Needs Refrigeration
EP
E
1. B
9) 1
D
3. Measuring
8) 8
C
O
8) 9
2. Cutting
2. F
3. E
4. A
D
5. C
Self-check 3.1.4
1. D
2. E
3. A
 Fresh fruit
 Whipped cream
 Custard
1. Butter cream
2. Glaze
3. Ganache
Room temperature
4. Filling




5. Whipped cream
4. C
Jelly
Gum paste
Glazes & syrup
Royal icing
5. B
255
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.